Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 3547 - Contract - Knox Gailet & Meador Inc - Renovations, Municipal Square - 02_14_1991
Resolution No. 3547 February 14, 1991 Item #31 HW:js RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: 6 THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and !directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract by and ;between the City of Lubbock and Knox, Gailey & Meador, Inc. for renovations at !Municipal Square, attached herewith, which shall be spread upon the minutes of lthe Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute ;and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this ATTEST: anette boya, city ,�ecre APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: (Gene Ea s, Purehasing Man ger !APPROVED AS TO FORM: flairold Willard, Assistant City ;Attorney 14th day of February , 1991. B. C. McMINN, MAYOR i:�3-sF7 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER THREE BIDS NUMBER 10987 TO: Knox, Gailey & Meador, Inc. P.O. Box 5736 Lubbock, Texas 79417 Original Amount of Contract $ 260,519.00 Amount Previous Change Orders 7,431.00 Net Amount this Change Order 3,877.00 Amended Amount of Contract $ 271,827.00 Percentage Change of Contract Price is 1.3% Additional Time of Completion is 10 Days The Date of Substantial Completion as of this Change Order is July 30, 1991 WHEREAS,. it 'is desirable to make changes in the plans and specifications for this project. THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The Contractor to furnish all labor and material to make changes as per attached proposal dated June 1, 1991. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands this the Ist day of June, 1991. CONTRACTOR: Knox, Gai & Mea Inc. BY: TITLE OWNER: City of Lubbock BY: X'��95� Deputy City Manager VIED AS TO FOR ` APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Ci Attorney e or of Building Services ATTACHMENT CHANGE ORDER 03 MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS BID 010987 POLICE ADMINISTRATION - BASE BID #1: 1. Repaint nine (9) offices and one (1) $ +650.00 large reception area. 2. Replace pivots on twelve (12) exterior +504.00 doors. 3. Repair and weld one (1) damaged door. +65.00 POLICE FRONT DESK: 1. Add quad electrical outlet. + 98.00 2. Paint back of showcase (2 coats) in +55.00 Office #5. 3. Paint walls, door and jamb across from +110.00 Office #105. 4. Furnish and install new 3' x 7' door in +300.00 existing frame, re -use existing hardware. 5. Install approximately 14' x 9' wall in Telephone +750.00 Equipment Room @ 3' x 7' door, frame and lock. Exterior of wall to be pre -finished gyp board and interior to be studs with no finish. POLICE PROPERTY ROOM: 1. Add key switch. +55.00 2. Install switch on overhead door leading to the +90.00 alley. 3. Add a door switch and motion detector for the safe_ +255.00 4. Exchange existing inside camera lens to a wide +153.00 angle lens. Attachment, Change Order #3 Municipal Square Renovations, Bid #10987 August 22, 1991 PAGE 2 COMMUNICATIONS CENTER BASE BID #4: 1. Paint three (3) walls of Basement Room #005. +85.00 2. furnish "Top Notch" carpet in lieu of Su.pertron. -53.00 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING - BASE BID #2: 1. Furnish and install electrical plug mold strip. +275.00 DATA PROCESSING - BASE BID #3: 1. Prepare floor surface and install City -furnished +485.00 carpet and new base. TOTAL NET AMOUNT $ +3,877.00 8/22/9.1 10987at3 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER FOUR BID NUMBER 10987 TO: Knox, Gailey & Meador, Inc. P.O. Box 5736 Lubbock, Texas 79417 Original Amount of Contract $ 260,519.00 Amount Previous Change Orders 11,308.00 Net Amount this Change Order 1,437.50 Amended Amount of Contract $ 273,264.50 Percentage Change of Contrast. Price is .6% Additional Time of Completion is 10 Days The Date of Substantial Completion as of this Change Order is August 9, 1991 WHEREAS, it is desirable to make changes in the plans. and specifications for this project. THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The Contractor to furnish all labor and material for installation of 3`0" x 7''0" solid core door and hardware in existing wall. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands this the 22nd day of July, 1991. CONTRACTOR: Knox, G y & dor, Inc. BY: TITLE �' � �f��_ rr1►�L OWNER: City of Lubbock BY: �4 Deputy City Manager APP UED AS TO CONTENT: ,rXre or of Building Services CHANGE ORDER NUMBER FIVE BID NUMBER 10987 TO: Knox, Gailey & Meador, Inc. P.O. Box 5736 Lubbock, Texas 79417 Original Amount of Contract $ 260,519.00 Amount Previous Change Orders 12,745.50 Net Amount this Change Order 4,562.50 Amended Amount of Contract $ 277,827.00 Percentage Change of Contract Price is 1.8% Additional Time of Completion is 10 Days The Date of Substantial Completion as of this Change Order is. August 19, 1991. WHEREAS, i.t is desirable to make changes in the plans and specifications for this project. THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The Contractor to furnish all labor and material to remove counter and install new wall and door. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands this the 21st day of August, 1991. CONTRACTOR:, Knox, Gail OWNER: City of Lubbock BY: a0C4z De uty City Manager AP OILED AS TO FORM': APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: AA":e'W 1 y Attorney re or of Building Services Z 3547 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS BID # 10987 CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas' In 51q- 1) ROUTING FOR SIGNATU // , 19 SMITH BOND CHECK BEST RATING RhSllp I TEXAS t - BY U 'v// 2) APP E AS TO CONTENT 3) APPROVE AS TO FORM 5) CITY SECRETARY THANKS,. MARIA b m� MAILED TO VENDOR: November 28, 1990 CLOSE: December 20, 1990 at 2:00 p.m. BID # 10987 ADDENDUM # 1 PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING: .� Please modify or amend Contract Documents per the attached sheets. ` THANK YOU Ron Shuffield CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT '" PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID ADDENDUM NO. ONE (1) .- To Drawings and Specifications Dated: 10/24/90 For: City of Lubbock Municipal Square Renovations ... Bid Item No. 2 Prepared By: Jones Rowntree Architects 3824 50th Street, Suite D Lubbock, Texas 79413-3808 , Addendum Date: 11/28/90 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: A. This addendum shall be considered part of the Contract Documents for the above mentioned project as though it has - been issued at the same time and incorporated integrally therewith. Where provisions of the following supplementary data differ from those of the original Contract Documents, this Addendum shall govern and take precedence. B. Bidders are hereby notified that they shall make any necessary adjustments in their estimates on account of this Addendum. It will be construed that each Bidders Proposal is submitted with full knowledge of all modifications and -supplemental data specified herein. Item No. 1 - Supplemental Drawing No. 1 The existing door (Door Schedule No. 16) into Traffic Signal Engineers Office, Room T103, is to remain as is in its current location. Add new door No. 25 in the southwest corner of the room. Door No. 25 to be 3'-0" x V -0" x 1.3/4" solid core red oak flush veneer for transparent finish, in a new painted hollow metal frame. Door to be fitted with hardware set No. 4. Item No. 2 - Supplemental Drawing No. 1 In the Traffic Signal Engineers Office, Room T103, add computer outlets and an outlet box for coaxial cable as shown. Item No. 3 - Supplemental Drawing Nos. 2, 3 and 4 �- In Records/Technicians Room T111, add three telephone outlets as shown. Move electrical outlet on west wall as shown. Add computer outlet on south wall as shown. Add a multi -outlet electrical strip and revise counter construction in Equipment Room T112 as detailed an Supplemental Drawings 3 and 4, END OF ADDENDUM NO. ONE (1) o Nowntmo AnhRo@ta 3824 50th Street, Suite D. Lubbock. Texas 79413 (806) 792-0096 PROJECT: C I TY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS BID ITEM NO. 2 NOTES KEYED NOTES DESIGNATED BY: CT EXISTING DOOR NO. 16 AND HARDWARE TO REMAIN. O NEW DOOR NO. 25: 3'-0" X 7'--0" SOLID CORE RED OAK IN PAINTED HOLLOW METAL FRAME. DOOR TO HAVE TRANSPARENT FINISH AND HARDWARE SET NO. 4. 3O. PROVIDE 2-COMPUTER/SURGE SUPPRESSION OUTLETS ON SEPARATE CIRCUIT IN OUTLET BOX. PATCH GYP BOARD WALL AS REQUIRED. 4O. INSTALL 1/2" CONDUIT IN WALL TO ABOVE CEILING, OUTLET BOX AND COVER FOR COAXIAL CABLE. PATCH GYP BOARD WALL AS REQUIRED. SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING FOR ADDENDUM NO. ONE (1) DATED: 11/28/96 o ftwnts@ Amhogftcft JR� 3824 50th Street, Suite D, Lubbock, Texas 79413 (806) 792-0096 PROJECT: C I TY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS BID ITEM NO. 2 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING NO. OM (2) A-25 4 EQUIPMENT ROOM A-28,30 T 112 FUTURE USE +54 2 3 8 �Il A-9 hr A-20 Nw RECORDS/TECHNICIANS T 111 NOTES KEYED NOTES DESIGNATED BY:C� 1O. ADD TELEPHONE OUTLETS INDICATED. 2O. MOVE OUTLET AS INDICATED FROM LOCATION SHOWN ON ORIGINAL PLAN. GADD MULTI -OUTLET STRIP ABOVE SHELF AS SHOWN ON ELEVATION ON SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING NO. 3. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED; 4 OUTLETS PER CIRCUIT. p 4O. REVISE COUNTER CONSTRUCTION AS SHOWN ON SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING NOS. 3 AND 4. SO. PROVIDE 1-COMPUTER/SURGE SUPPRESSION A_22 OUTLET AND 1-STANDARD OUTLET IN OUTLET BOX. PROVIDE SEPARATE CIRCUIT. SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING FOR ADDENDUM NO. ONE (1) DATED: 11/28/90 i jonsa 0 Rowntes ArchRooft 3824 50th Street, Suite D, Lubbock, Texas 79413 (806) 792--0096 PROJECT: C I TY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS BID ITEM NO. 2 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING NO. THREE (3) PLUGMOLD -\ �--LAMINATED PLASTIC TOP, EDGE AND BOTTOM PAINTED GYP BOARD T 3/4" BIRCH.. DfVfDERS , k LAMINATED PLASTIC TOP, EDGE AND SPLASH DRAWERS- ` I DRAWERS I ---ADJUSTABLE SHELF OPEN KNEE SPACE F7ADJUSTABLE SHELF PAINTED GYP BOARD 3'-0" 2'-11" RESILIENT BASE —'-~- BIRCH CABINETS FOR PAINT FINISH STANLEY NO. 4484 X US26D PULLS 3'-0" ELEVATION - COUNTER IN ROOM T112 3/411 = 1I-011 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING FOR ADDENDUM NO. ONE (1) DATED: 11/28/90 jonst ° Row8fltme Amhogt@cft —+ 3824 50th Street, Suite D. Lubbock, Texas 79413 (806) 792-0096 PROJECT: CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS BID ITEM NO. 2 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING NO. FOUR (4) PLUGMOLD N LAMINATED PLASTIC ON 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD = T' 0 3/4" BIRCH SUPPORTS 2'-0" PLUGMOLD , LAMINATED PLASTIC ON `-r `- 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD 1 X 4 CONT . -- K&V NO. 1395 SLIDES-----'\ r- I 1/2" W.P. SIDES & BACK-- 1/4" HARDBD. BOTTOM j °~ 1/4" BIRCH PLYWOOD r- �r K&V NO. 255 & 256 3/4" BIRCH PLYWOOD SECTION - COUNTER IN RM. T112 ., . 3/411 = 1 9 -0,1 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING FOR ADDENDUM NO. ONE (1) DATED: 11/28/90 A., MAILED TO VENDOR: November 19, 1990 CLOSE: 11/29/90 NEW CLOSE: 12/20/90 2:00 P.M. BID # 10987 ADDENDUM # PLEASE MODIFY OR AMEND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS FOLLOWS: 1. PLEASE CHANGE THE PREBID CONFERENCE TO BE HELD ON DECEMBER 10, 1990 AT 10:00 A.M., COMMITTEE ROOM 103, 1625 13TH STREET. 2. PLEASE CHANGE THE CLOSING DATE TO BE DECEMBER 20, 1990, at 2:00 P.M. T NK YO,., Ron Shufield, CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING OFFICE PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID RECEIVEU Nov 191990 J.R. PHARR MAILED TO VENDOR: December 10, 1990 CLOSE: December 20, 1990 BID # 10987 - MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS ADDENDUM # 3 PLEASE MODIFY OR AMEND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS FOLLOWS: 1. Please note that an additional prebid and walk thru will be held on Friday, December 14th, 1990 at 10:00 a.m., Training Room # 214, Municipal Square, 916 Texas Avenue. THANK YOU, Ron Shuffi CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID MAILED TO VENDOR: December 11, 1990 CLOSE: December 20, 1990 BID # 10987 - MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS ADDENDUM # 4 PLEASE MODIFY OR AMEND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS FOLLOWS: 1. Please include in the specifications the attached sheet; Section 01100 of the Specifications for Municipal Square Renovations as prepared by Jones Rowntree Architects. THANK YOU Ron Shuffie CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID p.. A- 0 SECTION 01100 ALTERNATES FART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Identification and description of Alternate work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Bid Documents: Quotation of cost of each Alternate. B. Owner --Contractor Agreement: Alternates accepted by Owner for inoorporation into the Work. C. sections of Specifications identified in each Alternate. 1.03 PROCEDURES A. Alternates will be exercised at the caption of Owner. S. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to complete the Work, including changem under each Alternate, when acceptance is designated in Owner --Contractor Agreement. 1.04 ALTERNATE NO. I A. Perform work associated with the provision and installation of Door No. 24 as indicated on Bid Item No. 2 of the plans. 1.05 ALTERNATE NO. 2 A. Perform work associated with the provision and installation of Doer No. 28 and enclosing wall as indicated on Did Item No. 3 of the plans. 1.06 ALTERNATE NO. 3 A. Provide and install replacement hardware and new restricted keyway Grand Master System as specified for total Municipal Square facility. PAET 2 PRODUCrTg Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END00$08ETTION MAILED TO VENDOR: December 14, 1990 CLOSE: 12/20/90 @ 2:00 P.M. BID # 10987 ADDENDUM # 5 PLEASE MODIFY OR AMEND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS FOLLOWS: 1. PLEASE DELETE IN ITS ENTIRETY THE SECTION 01031 OF SPECIFICATIONS BY MCCLARTY SMITH ON THE MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS. THERE SHALL BE NO ALLOWANCE OR CONTINGENCY AMOUNT INCLUDED IN THIS BID. 2. PLEASE REMOVE PROPOSAL FORM AND INSERT NEW PROPOSAL FORM ATTACHED. 3. PLEASE CHANGE TIME FOR COMPLETEION TO BE 150 DAYS. XKYOU, uffie CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING OFFICE PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID MAILED TO VENDOR: December 17, 1990 CLOSE: 12/20/90 @ 2:00 P.M. BID # 10987 ADDENDUM # 6 PLEASE MODIFY OR AMEND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PER THE ATTACHED SHEET. ZK YO , Ron Shuffi ld, CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING OFFICE PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID r-, ADDENDUM NO. To Drawings and Specifications Dated: 10/24/90 For: City of Lubbock Municipal Square Renovations Prepared By: Jones Rowntree Architects 3824 50th Street, Suite D Lubbock, Texas 79413-3808 Addendum Date: 12/17/90 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: A. This addendum shall be considered part of the Contract Documents for the above mentioned project as though it has been issued at the same time and incorporated integrally therewith. Where provisions of the following supplementary data differ from those of the original Contract Documents, this Addendum shall govern and take precedence. B. Bidders are hereby notified that they shall make any necessary adjustments in their estimates on account of this Addendum. It will be construed that each Bidders Proposal is submitted with full knowledge of all modifications and supplemental data specified herein. Item No. 1 - In the Drawings, Sheet No. 5, on the Reflected Ceiling Plan for Meeting Room 214, bidders are advised that the ceiling the work includes an approximately 2' vertical panel (field verify dimension) each side of the folding partition. Item No. 2 - In the Drawings, Sheet No. 7, in the Bid Item No. 2 Room Finish Schedule, ceiling type No. 2 shall be revised to read "2X4 lay -in" in lieu of 112X2 lay -in". END OF ADDENDUM NO. r_ r- CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS for TITLE: MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS ADDRESS: 916 TEXAS BID NUMBER: 10987 PROJECT NUMBER: 1481-552101-9157 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: Purchasing Department -1- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) r 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. INDEX PAGE NOTICE TO BIDDERS..........................................................................................3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS............................................................................4 BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS.................................................................10 PAYMENTBOND..............................................................................................13 PERFORMANCEBOND..........................................................................................16 CERTIFICATEOF INSURANCE..................................................................................19 CONTRACT..................................................................................................21 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT.......................................................................23 CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS...............................................................................41 SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................42 SPECIAL CONDITIONS........................................................................................43 NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE......................................................................................45 -2- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) NOTICE TO BIDDERS -3- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) r-• NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID # 10987 Sealed proposals addressed to Gene fads, C.P.M., Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 29th day of November. 1990. or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Gene Eads, Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 13th day of December. 1990, at Municipal Bldg., Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the Lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a ""' reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding'alL local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. 0 The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. r-- The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a pre -bid conference on 19th day of November. 1990, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., Committee Room #103, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street. CITY OF LUBBOCK BYe Gene Eads, C.P.M� Purchasing Manager ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS BID # 10987 r- Sealed proposals addressed to Gene Eads, C.P.M., Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 29th day of November. 1990. or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further directed to the provisions of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage scales and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the City of Lubbock. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and wiLL not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a prebid conference on 19th day of November, 1990, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., Conference Committee Room, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street. BY: Gene Eads, C.P.M. PURCHASING MANAGER (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) P-- GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS -4- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work to be done under the contract documents shall consist of the following: Renovation of Municipal Square and Police Property Room. The contractor shall furnish all Labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents. '-- 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ALL work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the Gen- eraL Conditions. ALL bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of aLL work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as e^— noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 120 (ONE HUNDRED TWENTY) calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated �.« by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so sub- mitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure comple- tion of the project within the time specified. 5. PAYMENT rM ALL payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. P_r 6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for Labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. -5- 7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail Will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for pro- tecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provi- sion. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. B. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against de- fective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished di- rectly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to sup- pliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Con- tractor. 10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materi- als, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construc- tion, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City re- serves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the ma- terials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. MS 12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construc- tion of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will fur- nish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. How- ever, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such under- ground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger sig- nals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. -� The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and Lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and re- placed by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barri- cades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 14. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shalt assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blast- ing. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem " necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 16. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written -7- notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subroga- tion. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. 17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations there- under. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract docu- ments does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construc- tion work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 18. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not Later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deduc- tions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. -8- The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 19. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to in- creases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be re- jected and returned to the bidder without being considered. ^'^ 20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be .� correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, dis- tinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an indi- ^"^ viduaL, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. if a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member, must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. if the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Proposal for (description of the project). pl— Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 21. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the fol- lowing: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Proposal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. (j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered ' incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents, -9- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) p- BID PROPOSAL -10- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) BID PROPOSAL BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PLACE / fJ DATE PROJECT NO. Proposal of /AMIM, (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction c,�onnstruct'ioonnjof�aa /U�Gp�i�'� �JtUIW/40 I'�,G"�(/Po''�ff/�C/ having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other re- lated contract documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surround- ing the construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifica- tions and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, of which this proposal is to be a part, is as follows: BASE BID ITEM #1: Interior Renovation of Police Administration, Meeting Room, and Exterior Doors: BASE BID ITEM #2: Renovation of Traffice Engineering Facility: ALTERNATE #1: (s z SW ) (ADD) BASE BID ITEM #3: Renovation of Data Processing: J� r ALTERNATE #2: (ADD) BASE BID ITEM #4: Renovation of Communications Center: ALTERNATE #3• (s /✓'� )0^^'� BASE BID ITEM #5: Renovation of Police Property Room: �jAA ALTERNATE #1: (s (ADD) -11- ALTERNATE #2: ($ (ADD) ALTERNATE #3• (ADD) ALTERNATE #4• (ADD) ALTERNATE #5: (ADD) BASE BID ITEM #6: Renovation of Police Holding Facility: ALTERNATE #1 (ADD) BASE BID ITEM #7: Renovation Police Front Desk: It//.V7J001& ($ �- X00 , (S ) (S 43, el f ) Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 120 (ONE HUNDRED TWENTY) _ consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of 550.00 (Fifty dollars) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with in- struction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the - work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars (S ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of .S % Dollars (S ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond -12- (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. r--A Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all con- tract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. 14400� Contractor BY: Jot (Seal,if Bidder is a Cor ation) ATTEST: iy Secretary -13- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) ^e SAFECO R- BID BOND Conforms with The American Institute of Architects, A.I.A. Document No. A-310 SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERIC/ FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 Bond KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, KNOX , GA I LEY & MEADOR , I NC. as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and the SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, of Seattle, Washington, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Washington, as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of F I VE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT B I D----------- ---------------- Dollars ($------ 5%-------- ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for MUN I C I PAL SQUARE RENOVAT I ONS NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 20TH day of Witness Witness DECEMBER ,1990 KNOX, GAILEY MEA R, INC. (Seal) Principal DON MiKDOR, SEC/TREASURER Title SAFE, SURANC PANY OF AMERICA B CARLA WADDELt Attorney -in -Fact ® Registered trademark of SAFECO Corporatio S-541EP 3190 PRINTED IN U.S., (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) POWER SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA ;.® GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA OF ATTORNEY HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA SASEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 IM KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 8035 That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA <;rid GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA,each a Washington corporation, does each hereby appoint ---------------HOWARD COWAN; CARLA WADDELL; KEVIN J. DUNN, Lubbock, Texas ------------ its true and lawful attorneys) -in -fact, with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued in the course of its business, and to bind the respective company,thereby. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and attested these presents this 21st day of November 19 89 .,.-ter:,- 'i.ti_.`•.. ...,.,�:r ._„--`i ._._ � ---- r+ CERTIFICATE Extract from the By -Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: "Article V, Section 13, — FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys -in -fact- or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the .-.. company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business ... On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970. "On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out, (i) The provisions of Article V, Section 13 of the By -Laws, and (ii) A copy of the power -of -attorney appointment, executed pursuant thereto, and (iii) Certifying that said power -of -attorney appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." 1, Boh A. Dickey, Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By -Laws and of'a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations, and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By -Laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation r 4 M 7 f i S-974 R10 3,86 this 20TH day of DECEMBER . jV PRINTED IN U S A (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) PAYMENT BOND -14- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) BOND CHECK SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA neA L GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA SAFECO .e, 1. PAYMENT BOND (McGregor Act — Public Works) Texas DC01 KAl1NG lf-/ FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY CICENMETEXAS OF AMERICA HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA DATE(�y SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 Bond No. 5687633 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, That, we, KNOX , GA I LEY & MEADOR , INC. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Washington, with its principal office in the City of Seattle, Washington, and authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the amount of TWO HUNDRED S I XTY THOUSAND F I VE HUNDRED NINETEEN AND NO/100------------------------------- ------------------------- Dollars, for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the day of FEBRUARY 1991 , to wit MUNICIPAL SQUARE IMPROVEMENTS which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him/her or a sub —contractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this, instrument this 19TH day of FEBRUARY 1991 KNOX, G EY & OOR, INC (Seal) DON MEADOR, SECRETARY/TREASURER Principal SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA (Seal) By. CZeA (Seal) CARLA WADDELL Attorney -in -Fact Registered Trademark of SAFECO Insurance Compa S-2170/EP 3190 PRINTED IN U.S. POWER OF ATTORNEY SAFECO No. KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: m SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMEBIC HOME OFFICE SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 8035 That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA :I,.d GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA,each a Washington corporation, does each hereby appoint ---------------HOWAR.D COWAN; CARLA WADDELL; KEVIN J. DUNN, Lubbock, Texas its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact, with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued in the course of its business, and to bind the respective company thereby IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and attested these presents this 21st ^ day of November 19 89 CERTIFICATE Extract from the By -Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: "Article V, Section 13. — FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys -in -fact' or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business ... On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970. "On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out, (i) The provisions of Article V, Section 13 of the By -Laws, and (ii) A copy of the power -of -attorney appointment, executed pursuant thereto, and (iii) Certifying that said power -of -attorney appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." I, Boh A. Dickey, Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By -Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations, and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By -Laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation i this 1 9TH day of F .RR TARY 19 1 44'. .e: � � '� r`r! I n..a w;:. a-''� ®..a •^; � `<r�+�"✓'✓ � ..,..a.��-c-,PV .'i 1 s� S-974 RIO 1,86 PRINTED IN U S A PERFORMANCE BOND -17- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) SAFECO PERFORMANCE BOND (McGregor Act — Public Works) Texas BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSED IN TIM DATE-$ -y' 8y SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 Bond No. 5687533 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, That, we, KNOX , GA I LEY & MEADOR , INC. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Washington, with its principal office in the City of Seattle, Washington, and authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter called the Obliges) in the amount of TWO HUNDRED SIXTY THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED NINETEEN AND NO/100------------------------------- ------------------------ Dollars, for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the day of FEBRUARY 1991 , to wit MUNICIPAL SQUARE IMPROVEMENTS which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION /S SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. /N WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 19TH dayof FEBRUARY 19 91 I Witness: (if Individual or Firm) Attest (If Corporation) (Seal) (Seal) KNOX , 9*)l LEY AEADOR , I NC . (Seal) (Seal) DIDN MEADOR, SECRETARY/TREASURER Principal SAFEC SURA COMPANY OF AMERICA By (Seal) CARLA WADDELL A++---;.,—G,,., S-2169/EP 3190 Registered Trademark of SAFECO Insurance Compa. PRINTED IN U.S. ® POWER SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA_ OF ATTORNEY GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERIC HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA SAFECOSEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 IPA KNOW ALL BY THESEPRESENTS: 8035 That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA <,;,d GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA,each a Washington corporation, does each hereby appoint __________HOWARD COWAN; CARLA WADDELL; KEVIN J. DUNN, Lubbock, Texas its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact, with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued in the course of its business, and to bind the respective company thereby IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and attested these presents this 21st ! day of November CERTIFICATE Extract from the By -Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: 19 89 "Article V, Section 13. — FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys- in -fact- or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business ... On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970. "On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out, (i) The provisions of Article V, Section 13 of the By -Laws, and (ii) A copy of the power -of -attorney appointment, executed pursuant thereto, and (iii) Certifying that said power -of -attorney appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." I, Boh A. Dickey, Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By -Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations, and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By -Laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation 'u) It F U'„ S-974 R70 3: 86 this 19TH day of FEBRUARY , 19 _91 PRINTED IN U S A. w IMPORTANT NOTICE: PLEASE READ COMPLAINT NOTICE: SHOULD ANY DISPUTE ARISE ABOUT YOUR PREMIUM OR ABOUT A CLAIM THAT YOU HAVE FILED, CONTACT THE AGENT OR WRITE TO THE COMPANY THAT ISSUED THE BOND #5687533. IF THE PROBLEM IS NOT RESOLVED, YOU MAY ALSO WRITE THE STATE BOARD OF INSURANCE, P.O. BOX 149091, AUSTIN, TEXAS 78714-9091. FAX # (512)475-1771. THIS NOTICE OF COMPLAINT PROCEDURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AND DOES NOT BECOME A PART OR CONDITION OF THIS BOND #5687533. DISCLOSURE OF GUARANTY FUND NONPARTICIPATION IN THE EVENT THE INSURER (SURETY) IS UNABLE TO FULFILL ITS CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATION UNDER THIS POLICY OR CONTRACT OR APPLICATION OR CERTIFICATION OR EVIDENCE OF COVERAGE, THE POLICYHOLDER OR CERTIFICATEHOLDER IS NOT PROTECTED BY AN INSURANCE GUARANTY FUND OR OTHER SOLVENCY PROTECTION ARRANGEMENT. (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) r- 0 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE -20- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) ISSUE ;:. DATE MMIDD/YY) alall��l® CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 2-1 g-91 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE The Shropshire Agency, Inc. DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE P. 0. Box 10428 POLICIES BELOW. Lubbock, Texas 79408 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE 806-763-7311 _.....,.... COMPANY A LETTER Aetna Casualty & Surety Company COMPANY B INSURED LETTER Travelers Insurance Company Knox, Gailey & Meador, Inc. COMPANY LETTERC P. 0. Box 5736 _ United States Fideltiy Gua.rGuarantyCompanyCOMPA Lubbock, Texas 79417 LE TERNY D 8o6-763-0418 _ .. COMPANY E LETTER COVERAGES_�k� THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER LTR POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS DATE (MMIDD/YY) DATE (MM/DDIYY) GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 1,000,000. A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG. $ 1,000,000. CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR. 60TCP5505207 4-20-90 4-20-91 PERSONAL & ADV. INJURY $ 500,000. ..,._: OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT. EACH OCCURRENCE $ 500,000. FIRE DAMAGE (Any one tire) $ 50,000. MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) $ 5,000. AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE $ A X ANY AUTO LIMIT 500,000. 00,000 X ALL OWNED AUTOS 60FJ5505208 4-20-90 4-20-91 BODILY INJURY X SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) $ X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ X NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY PROPERTY DAMAGE $ EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000. A X UMBRELLA FORM 60XS5505210 4-20-91 4-20-91 AGGREGATE $ 1,000,000. OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKER'S COMPENSATION STATUTORY LIMITS B 6EE-UB-932JO15-0-90 4-20-90 4-20-91 EACH ACCIDENT $ 500,000. AND DISEASE —POLICY LIMIT $ 500,000. EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY _. DISEASE —EACH EMPLOYEE $ OTHER C All Risk. Ruilder's CIM125854586 3-21-90 3-21-91 $ 5,000,000. Risk Incl. Owner DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS Re: Municipal Square Renovation - Bid #10987 CERTIFICATE HOLDER = k CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE City of Lubbock EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE Lubbock, Texas LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. H 12 D PRESENTATIVE i � ACORD G a '- ©ACORD CORPORATION 199f POWER OF ATTORNEY SAFECO M KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICQ- GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERIC HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 8035 That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA <-:r!d GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA,each a Washington corporation, does each hereby appoint HOWARD COWAN; CARLA WADDELL; KEVIN J. DUNN, Lubbock, Texas ------------ its true and lawful attorneys) -in -fact, with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued in the course of its business, and to bind the respective company thereby IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and attested these presents this 21st ___ day of November CERTIFICATE Extract from the By -Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: 19 89 "Article V, Section 13. — FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys -in -fact- or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business ... On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970. "On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out, (i) The provisions of Article V, Section 13 of the By -Laws, and (ii) A copy of the power -of -attorney appointment, executed pursuant thereto, and (iii) Certifying that said power -of -attorney appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." 1, Boh A. Dickey, Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By -Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations, and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By -Laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation this 19TH day of FEBRUARY , 19 91 S - 9 7 4 R10 3,r86 PRINTED IN U S A n CONTRACT -22- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) 1. CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 14th day of February, 1991, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through B.C. McMinn, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and KNOX, GAILEY & MEADOR, INC.of the City of LUBBOCK, County of LUBBOCK and the State of TEXAS, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CON- TRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as fol- lows: BID #10987-MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS IN THE AMOUNT OF $260,519.000 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. AT EST: CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (OWNER) lk By JSecre ry MAYOR APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: AS TO FORM: ATTEST: Corporate Secretary By: TITLE: COMPLETE ADD SS: PO BOX 5736 Lubbock, TX 79417 -22- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE AGREEMENT -24- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this con- tract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: KNOX, GALLEY & MEADOR, INC. , who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to JERRY SMITH, DIRECTOR OF BUILDING SERVICES, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these .., contract documents, including the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect construc- tions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of a-, the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. S. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. Whenever in the Specifications or drawings accompanying this agreement, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their na- ture, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the Owner's Representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms, or clauses defining the character of the work. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no re- sponsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated -24- by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract docu- ments. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract docu- ments has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly Locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract docu- ments. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract docu- ments, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his on -site observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. -25- 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commence- ment of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Con- tractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Repre- sentative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representa- tive at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representative's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direc- tion of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising there- from shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided. ^` The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise rela- tive to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing. r-� 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Con- tractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. -27- 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Con- tractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the na- ture and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of mate- rials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or dis- orderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work with- out the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecu- tion and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall fur- nish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public ob- servation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. -28- 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such obser- vation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give am- ple notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Rep- resentative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, re- gardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Repre- sentative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representa- tive to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representa- tive, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspec- tions, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as un- suitable or not inconformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and re- build or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is fur- ther agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with, if they in- crease the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such .�• work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra work. In -29- case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or mate- rial already furnished or used in said work, then the owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, al- teration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not cov- ered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representa- tive when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is com- menced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) per cent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this para- graph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these mat- ters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machin- ery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and com- pensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other ele- ments of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the 'tactual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Repre- sentative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the owner's Representative in- sists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbi- tration as herein below provided. -30- 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor r-- and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of, these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any re- quest for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein speci- fied, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which Rolicy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at aLL times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees.and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention r• in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indem- nify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sus- tained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcon- tractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an I'ndependent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as welt as any notice which may be given by the Owners or.the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work pro- gresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assump- tion of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. -31- 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the Life of this contract, in- surance protection as hereinafter specified. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company au- thorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $300,000 Bodily Injury and $300,000 Property Damage per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion 110 waived) The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. The Contractor shalt obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as foLLows For bodily injuries, including accidental death, $500,000 per occurrence, and $100,000 for Property Damage. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury $250/500,000 Property Damage $100,000 to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non- c owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of (100% of poten- tial loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. -32- E. Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of ($1,000,000 minimum) with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehen- sive Automobile Liability coverages. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance As required by State statute covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Sub- contractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $100,000 limit. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The Location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3)' The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named in- sured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) con- tained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be accept- able. 29. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, Laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts �-" thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. if during the progress of the work, Contractor shall aLlow'any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness -33. shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, de- vice, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Paten- tee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is speci- fied or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, de- vice, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harm- less from any loss on account thereof. If the material. or process specified or required by Owner is an in- fringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 31. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, in- sofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 32. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 33. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the con- sideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $100.00 (ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages MIA for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the com- pletion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consid- eration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this local- ity. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impractica- bility and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sus- tain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from �., current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this r., contract. 34. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Con- tractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contact, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the sev- eral parts. 35. EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walk -outs, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an ex- tension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after re- ceipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested docu- mentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their con- sideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be'settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided. P, 36. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays in- cident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge -35- shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 37. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals of- fered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 38. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be Liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the perfor- mance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the exis- tence or character of the work. 39. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 40. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of de- fective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before fina{•payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against owner's premises by reason of any work under the con- tract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. -36- 41. PARTIAL PAYMENTS on or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an applica- tion for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for par- tial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound ma- terials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% �-- shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon rM^ written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained per- centage due Contractor. 42. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall in- spect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in ac- cordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 43. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or be- fore the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this con- tract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special condi- tions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 44. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Con- tractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for p-- any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the .37- date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed de- fects with reasonable promptness. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from Loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted other- wise in the contract documents. 48. ARBITRATION All questions of dispute under this agreement shall be submitted to arbitration at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may agree upon one arbitrator, otherwise, there shall be three; one named in writing by each party and the third chosen by the two arbiters selected; or if the arbiters fail to se- lect a third within ten (10) days, he shall be chosen by the District Judge, 72nd Judicial District of Texas. Each arbiter shall be a resident of the City of Lubbock. Should the party demanding arbitration fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the de- cision of the Owner's Representative shall be final and binding on him. Should the other party fail to choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the Owner's Representative shall appoint such arbiter. Should ei- ther party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both parties to take Ex Parte Proceedings. The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties to the contract, unless either or both parties shall appeal within ten (10) days from date of the award by the ar- biters, and it is hereby agreed that each party shall have the right of appeal and all proceedings shall be according to and governed by Arbitration Statutes of Texas, being Article 224, et seq., Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITERS UPON ANY QUESTION SUBMITTED TO ARBITRATION UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE A CONDITION PRECEDENT TO ANY RIGHT OF LEGAL ACTION. -38- The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose contention is sus- tained, such sums as they deem proper for the time, expense and. trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The ar- biters shall fix their own compensation, unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of 'the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbiters must be made in writ- ing and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or award. 49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the or- ders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and sup- plies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com- plated by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com- plated by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess �p to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspa- per having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be r-. issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. -39. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machin- ery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorpo- rated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Con- tractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Con- tractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owners Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 51. BONDS The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statu- tory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is fur- ther agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special con- ditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. -40- 53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and au- thority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to ob- serve Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 55. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises .free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall Leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be Left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. -41- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS -42- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) • �; Resolution #2502 January 8, 1987 Agenda Item #18 DGV:da RESOLUTION WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February . 23, 1984; and WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which -- exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades Exhibit C: Electrical Trades Exhibit D: Overtime Rate Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1987. -Cl Ranette,.Boyd, City Secretary G APPROVED T. ONTENT: Bi 1 P yne, D rector of Building Services B.C. McMINN, MAYOR APPROVED AS TO FORM: DoWald G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator - Heavy Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator, Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker. Laborer, General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder - Certified Hourly Rate $11.60 8.35 - 5.50 10.50 5.00 11.00 5.50 7.35 8.70 10.50 5.25 8.00 5.70 8.00 7.50 9.50 5.00 7.30 4.75 5.60 8.75 9.25 6.00 7.65 4.75 8.75 5.50 8.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction - Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Asphalt Heaterman Asphalt Shoveler Concrete Finisher Concrete Finisher -Helper Electrician Flagger Form Setter Form Setter -Helper Laborer, General Laborer, Utility Mechanic Mechanic -Helper POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machinist Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator Light Equipment Operator Motor Grade Operator. Roller Scraper Tractor Truck Driver - Light Heavy e Hourlv Rate $5.25 4.75 7.35 4.75 10.50 4.75 6.50 5.50 4.75 5.80 6.50 6.00 6.00 5.25 6.50 5.85 6.40 6.40 8.00 5.25 5.25 5.50 5.25 5.25 EXHIBIT C Electric Construction Trades Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Power Line Foreman $11.00 Lineman Journeyman 10.45 Lineman Apprentice Series 8.90 Groundman Series 7.25 EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate. EXHIBIT E Prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is.1 1/2 times base rate. ma a.. SPECIFICATIONS -43- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) r-- TABLE OF CONTENTS CITY OF LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL SQUARE RENOVATIONS LUBBOCK, TEXAS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 - Summary of Work 01031 - Alteration Project Procedures 01045 - Cutting and Patching 01100 - Alternates 01300 - Submittals 01400 - Quality Control 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Control:_ 01600 - Material and Equipment 01700 - Contract Closeout DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE WORK 03001 - Concrete Work DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04001 - Masonry DIVISION 5 - METALS .a A!;,®F Not Used ..S«P 'UAL:+Gri DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS whew. W.O.Palwr.mA osoee.ye ua.,a ou• 06001 - Carpentry Work « R t A ,`sftia,, DIVISION `I - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ;4y� 07213 - Batt Insulation DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS RED ARC Cj , K. Row y , 08110 - Standard Steel Doors �.w a9 tI 08111 - Standard Steel Frames 08120 - Aluminum Doors and Frames 08210 - Wood Doors 08700 - Hardware (P 66 Q� 08800 - Glass and Glazing E OF SECTION 01400 CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL PART A GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Quality control of products and workmanship. B. Manufacturer's instructions. C. Manufacturer's certificates and field services. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Field samples. B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product options. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, workmanship, and site conditions, to produce Work in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.04 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards of the region except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Provide suitably qualified personnel to produce Work of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. D. Provide finishes to match approved samples. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When required in individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's printed instructions in quantity required for product data, for delivery, handling, storage, assembly, installation, startup, adjusting, balancing, and finishing, as appropriate. B. Require compliance with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. C. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 01400-1 r 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required in individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's certificate, in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements, executed by responsible officer. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When required in individual Specifications section, have supplier provide qualified representative to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect/Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION 01400-2 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work by Contractor. B. Work by Owner. C. Contractor use of premises. D. Owner occupancy. 1.02 WORK BY CONTRACTOR A. The Owner will award a contract to one Bidder. The contract will commence on the date given in the Notice to Proceed. All Work involves areas of Municipal Square .Building, City of" Lubbock, located at 10th Street and Texas Ave., Lubbock, Texas. Work under this contract includes: Bid Item No. 1 - Interior renovation of designated areas of Police Administration Section; interior renovation of Meeting Rooins 21.2 and - 214; replacement of doors and/or hardware at designated exiting exterior, door locations. Bid Item No. 2 -- Interior renovation of designated area: of Traffic Engineering Section. Bid Item No. 3 - Interior -renovation of designated areas of Data Processing Section and Information Services Center. Bid Item No. 4 - Interior renovation of designated areas of Communications Center. Alternate No. 1 - Addition of an exterior door designated in Bid Item No. 2. Alternate No. 2 - Addition of a pair of doors designated in Bid Item No. 3. Alternate No. 3 - Replacement hardware and new restricted. keyway Grand Master System for total Municipal Square facility. B. The Contract will be awarded on the basis of a single lump sum bid. comprising the total work involved in all four bid items of -the project. For budgeting purposes of the Owner each bidder shall, as part of his bid, indicate the dollar amount of his bid attributable tc each of the four bid items, C. Designated Bid Items are not intended or considered to be Bid alternates; partial bids or bids indicating the Bid Items as alternates will riot be accepted. 01010-1 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A. Any items rioted 'NIC' (Not in Contract), furnishings, equipment, and appliances will be furnished and installed by Owner after completion of the Contract. B. Owner will move and relocate furnishings as required. Contractor Is to coordinate with the Owner concerning times that furnishings will need to be moved. C. Following disassembly by General Contractor, Owner will move designated demountable partitions from Police Administration and Traffic Engineering areas to storage. D. Owner will provide prefinished panels for General Contractor installation in designated areas of Communications Center-. E. Owner will relocate designated electrical equipment in Communications Center. 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Limit use of premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Owner. 3. Use of site and premises by the public B. Access to Site: Limited to hours that the building is maintained open by the Owner unless specific arrangements are made with the Owner. C. Emergency Building Exits: All existing emergency exits shall remain operable at all times during Construction. D. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. E. Time Restrictions for Performing Work: Limited to hours that the building is maintained open by the Owner unless specific arrangements are made with the Owner. F. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Not allowed unless prior arrangements are made with, and approval is given by, the Owner. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCES A. Construct Work in stages as needed to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements during the construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner. 1.06 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner will occupy the premises during the entire period of construction and will conduct normal operations. 01010-2 B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations, C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. END OF SECTION 01010-3 SECTION 01031 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate work of trades and schedule elements of alterations and renovation work by procedures and methods to expedite completion of the Work. B. In addition to demolition specified in Section 02072, and that d specifically shown, out, move or remove items as necessary to provide access or to allow alterations and new work to proceed. Include such items as: 1. Repair or removal of hazardous or unsanitary conditions. 2. Removal of abandoned items and items serving no useful purpose, such as abandoned piping, conduit and wiring. 3. Removal of unsuitable or extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such as abandoned furnishings and equipment, and debris such as rotted wood, rusted metals and deteriorated �^ concrete. 4. Cleaning of surfaces, and removal of surface finishes as needed to install new work and finishes. C. Patch, repair and refinish existing items to remain, to -the specified condition for each material, with a workmanlike transition to adjacent new items of construction. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01045: Cutting and Patching. B. Section 02072: Minor Demolition for Remodeling. 1.03 ALTERATIONS CUTTING AND PROTECTION A. Assign the work of moving, removal, cutting and patching, to trades qualified to perform the work in a manner to cause least damage to each type of work, and provide means of returning surfaces to appearance of new work. B. Perform cutting and removal work to remove minimum necessary, and in a manner to avoid damage to adjacent work. C. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster or metals, by methods to terminate surfaces in a straight line at a natural point of division. D. Perform cutting and patching as specified in Section 01045. 01031-1 E. Protect existing finishes, equipment, and adjacent work which is scheduled to remain, from damage. F. Protect existing and new work from weather and extremes• of temperature. G. Maintain existing interior work above 60 degrees F. H. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control as needed to prevent damage to remaining existing work and to new work. H. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from existing building and from areas occupied by Owner, and to provide weather protection. I. Discoveries of construction, furnishings and articles• having a historic or private value shall remain in possession of Owner. 1. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer. 2. Protect discovery from damage from elements or work. 3. Architect/Engineer will promptly transmit Owner's decision for disposition of discovery. 4. Contractor shall store items to be retained by Owner• in a safe, dry place on site, or shall dispose of items which -Owner releases. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Salvage sufficient quantities of cut or removed material to replace damaged work of existing construction, when material is not readily obtainable on current market. B. Store salvaged items in a dry, secure place on site. C. Items not required for use in repair of existing work shall become the property of the contractor, unless noted otherwise. D. Do not incorporate salvaged or used material in new construction except with permission of Architect/Engineer. 2.02 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING A. Provide same products or types of construction as that in existing structure, as needed to patch, extend or match existing work. B. Generally Contract Documents will not define products or• standards of workmanship present in existing construction. C. Contractor shall determine products by inspection and any necessary testing; and workmanship by use of the existing as a sample of comparison. 01031-2 0 D. Presence of a product, finish, or type of construction, requires that patching, extending or matching shall be performed as necessary to make Work complete and consistent to identical standards of quality. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE A. Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching existing quality of workmanship. Quality of patched or extended work shall be not less than that specified for new work. 3.02 ADJUSTMENTS A. Where partitions and/or existing built-in components are removed, patch floors, walls, and ceilings with finish materials to match existing. B. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors and ceilings to provide smooth planes without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. C. Where extreme change of plane of two inches or more occurs, -^ request instructions from Architect/Engineer as to method of making transition. 0 D. Trim and refinish existing doors as necessary to clear new floors. 3.03 DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch and replace any portion of an existing finished surface which is damaged, lifted, discolored, or shows other imperfections, with matching material. B. Provide adequate support of substrate prior to patching the finish. C. Refinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces in a manner to product uniform color and texture over entire surface. D. When existing surface finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.04 TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW WORK A. When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make a smooth and workmanlike transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so that the patch or transition is invisible at a distance of five feet. B. When finished surfaces are cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing 01031-3 surface in a neat manner along a straight line at a natural line of division, and provide trim appropriate to finished surface. 3.05 CLEANING A. Perform periodic and final cleaning as specified in Section 01700. B. Clean Owner -occupied areas daily. C. Clean spillage, overspray, and heavy collection of dust in Owner -occupied areas immediately. D. At completion of work of each trade, clean area and make surfaces ready for work of successive trades. E. At completion of alterations work in each area, provide final cleaning and return space to a condition suitable for use by Owner. END OF SECTION 01031-4 SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Work by Owner or by separate contractors. B. Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling: Removal of designated construction. C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Substitutions. D. Individual Specifications Sections: Cutting and patching incidental to work of the section. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching as required to complete the Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with the work. 2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work. -. 4. Remove samples of installed work for testing. 5. Provide openings in non-structural elements for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration Y- which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. B. Include in request: 1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. �- 4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 01045-1 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Those required for original installation. B. For any change in materials, submit request for substitution in accordance with Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditioins. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by work. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. B.Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. D. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION 01045-2 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Procedures. B. Shop Drawings. C. Product Data. D. Samples. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers' field service reports. B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Manufactuers instructions. C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Closeout Submittals. 1.03 PROCEDURES A. Deliver submittals to Architect/Engineer at address listed on cover of Project Manual. B. Transmit each item under Architect/Engineer accepted form. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, major supplier; identify pertinent Drawing Sheet and detail number, and Specification section number, as appropriate. Identify deviations from Contract Documents. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps. C. After Architect/Engineer review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identifying changes made since previous submittal. D. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. r-- 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. 1.05 PRODUCT DATA A. Mark each copy to identify applicable Products, models, 01300-1 options, and other data; supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to the Work. Include manufacturers' installation instructions when required by the Specification section. B. Submit the number of copies which Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. 1.06 SAMPLES A. Submit full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect/Engineer's seleciton. Submit samples for selection of finishes within 30 days after date of Contract. B. Submit Samples to illustrate functional characteristics of the Product with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different catagories for interfacing work. C. Include identification on each Sample, giving full information. D. Submit the number specified in respective Specification section; one will be retained by Architect/Engineer. Reviewed Samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in the Specification Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01300-2 r-a SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Electricity, Lighting. B. Heat, Ventilation. �- C. Telephone Service. D. Water. E. Sanitary Facilities. F. Construction Aids. r-. G. Barriers. H. Cleaning During Construction. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01010 - Summary of the work. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final Cleaning. 1.03 ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING A. Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Pernanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. D. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve at least the minimum lighting level required by OSHA. E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.04 HEAT, VENTILATION A. Coordinate use of existing facilities with Owner; extend and supplement with temporary units as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations, to protect materials and 01500-1 finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. B. Provide ventilation of enclosed areas to cure materials, to disperse humidity, and to prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors or gases. C. Utilize existing ventilation equipment. Supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.05 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide mobile phones or use public telephones (pay phones). Do not use Owner's business phones. 1.06 WATER A. Connect to existing facilities; Owner will pay for water used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. 1.07 SANITARY FACILITIES A. Existing facilities may be used during construction operations; maintain in sanitary condition. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Designated existing stairs may be used by construction personnel. Coordinate use with Owner. B. Designated existing elevators may be used by construction personnel and for materials. Coordinate use with Owner. Provide protective coverings for finish surfaces of cars and entrances. 1.09 BARRIERS A. Provide as required to prevent public entry to construction areas, to provide for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. 1.10 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; daily dispose of off -site. B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. 1.11 REMOVAL A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services and construction prior to Substantial Completion inspection. 01500-2 B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified, or to original condition. ... PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION —. Not Used P- END OF SECTION 01500-3 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Products. B. Workmanship. C. Manufacturers' Instructions. D. Transportation and Handling. E. Storage and Protection. F. Substitutions and Product Options. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01010 - Summary of the Work. B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittal of manufacturers' certificates. C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. D. Section 01400 - Quality Control. 1.03 PRODUCTS A. Products include material, equipment, and systems. B. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements. C. Components required to be supplied in quantity within a Specification section shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable. D. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing structure, except as specifically required, or allowed, by Contract Documents. 1.04 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. 01600-1 1.05 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS A. When work is specified to comply with manufacturers' instructions submit copies as specified in Section 01300, distribute copies to persons involved, and maintain one set in field office. B. Perform work in accordance with details or instructions and specified requirements. Should a conflict exist between Specifications and instructions, consult with Architect/Engineer. 1.06 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport Products by methods to avoid Product damage; deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry. B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling or damage. C. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged. 1.07 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store Products in accordance with Manufacturers' instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive Products in weather -tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. B. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure Products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions. C. After installation, provide coverings to protect Products from ., damage from traffic and construction operations, remove when no longer needed. 1.08 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Within 21 days after date of Contract, submit complete list of major Products proposed, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model. B. Options: 1. Products specified only by reference standard: any Product meeting that standard. 2. Products specified by naming several manufacturers: Products �. of any named manufacturer meeting Specifications. 3. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers and "or equal": Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named, prior to bid date. 4. Products specified by naming only one manufacturer; No Option. 01600-2 1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Only within 21 days after date of Contract will Architect/Engineer consider requests from Contractor for substitutions. Subsequently, substitutions will be considered only when a Product becomes unavailable due to no fault of Contractor. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. C. Request constitutes a representation that Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds, in all respects, specified Product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for substitution as for specified Product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make other changes which may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. 4. Waives claims for additional costs which may subsequently become apparent. D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals without separate written request, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. E. Architect/Engineer will determine acceptability of proposed substitution, and will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection in writing within a reasonable time. 1.10 REUSE OF EXISTING MATERIAL A. Except as specifically indicated or specified, materials and equipment removed from the existing structure shall not be used in the completed Work. B. For material and equipment specifically indicated or specified to be reused in the Work: 1. Use special care in removal, handling, storage and reinstallation, to assure proper function in the completed Work. 2. Arrange for transportation, storage and handling of products which require off -site storage, restoration or renovation. Pay all costs for such work. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01600-3 SECTION 01700 -- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED °- A. Closeout Procedures. B. Final Cleaning. C. Project Record Documents. D. Operation and Maintenance Data. E. Warranties and Bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of the Contract: Fiscal provisions, legal submittals, and other administrative requirements. B. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Cleaning during construction. w- 1.03 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Comply with procedures stated in General Conditions of the Contract for issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. When Contractor considers Work has reached final completion, submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's inspection. C. In addition to submittals required by the conditions of the Contract, provide submittals required by governing authorities, and submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. D. Architect/Engineer will, if required, issue a final change ^^ order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously made by Change Order. E. Owner will occupy all of the project area as specified in Section 01010. 1.04 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute prior to final inspection. P- "' 01700-1 B. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. C. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the Project. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Store documents separate from those used for construction. B. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. C. At Contract Closeout, submit documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch three-ring side binders with durable plastic covers. B. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of: Architect/Engineer and Contractor. C. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by Specification division. For each Specification division, give names, addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers. List: 1. Appropriate design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list. 4. Operating instructions. 5. Maintenance instructions, equipment. 6. Maintenance instructions, finishes. 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 8. Warranties. 1.07 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Provide duplicate, notarized copies. Execute Contractor's submittals and assembly documents executed by subcontractors, supplies, and manufacturers. Provide table of contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover. B. Submit material prior to final application for payment. For equipment put into use with Owner's permission during construction, submit within 10 days after first operation. For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 01700-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .A Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION q.- 01700-3 SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Remove designated building equipment and fixtures. B. Remove designated partitions and components. C. Identify utilities. D. Refer to items as indicated on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01010 - Summary of the Work: Owner occupancy during construction. B. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching. C. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary enclosures; Temporary barriers; Security; Cleaning during construction. D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record document. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit record drawings in accordance with Section 01700. 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas. Maintain protected egress and access at all times. B. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to all applicable codes for demolition work, safety of structure, and dust control. B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. D. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. 02072-1 E. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems .e. without prior written notice to Owner. F. Conform to applicable procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION -- 3.01 PREPARATION A. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, fumes, noise, and smoke to provide for Owner occupancy as specified in Section 01010. B. Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered. C. Disconnect, remove, and cap designated utility services within demolition areas. D. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify and indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents. 3.02 DEMOLITION A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. B. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site. C. Relics, antiques, and similar objects remain the property of the Owner. Notify Architect/Engineer prior to removal and obtain acceptance regarding method of removal. D. Remove materials to be reinstalled or retained in a manner to prevent damage. Store and protect in accordance with requirements of Section 01600. E. Remove the following materials and equipment to be retained by Owner. Owner will transport to storage. 1. Demountable partitions and accessories as indicated. F. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered. G. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave areas of work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 02072-2 SECTION 03001 CONCRETE WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Formwork, complete with required shoring, bracing,and anchorage. B. Concrete reinforcing, complete with required supports, spacers and related accessories. C. Cast -in -place concrete. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform cast -in -place concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, unless specified otherwise in this Project Manual. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CEMENT (ACI 301 2.1) A. Use one brand and type of cement throughout project unless otherwise specified. 2.02 ADMIXTURES (ACI 301 2.2) A. Add air entraining agent as indicated in ACI 301 table 3.4.1. B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when accepted by Architect/Engineer. If accepted, use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. Use calcium chloride only with written consent of Architect/Engineer. C. Use set -retarding admixtures during hot weather only when accepted by Architect/Engineer. 2.03 STRENGTH CAC I 301 3.2) A. Provide concrete of following strength: Compressive strength (28 day): 3000 psi. 2.04 AIR ENTRAINMENT (ACI 301 3.4) A. Add air entraining agent to concrete mix for concrete work exposed to exterior. 2.05 REINFORCING STEEL (ACI 301 5.2) 03001-1 A. Reinforcing Steel: 40 yield grade; deformed billet steel bars, ASTM A615, plain finish. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: plain type, ASTM A185; in coiled rolls; plain size 6 X 6 10/10 unless noted otherwise in all �.. concrete slabs. 2.06 EXPANSION JOINTS (ACI 301 6.2) A. 1/2" asphalt impregnated mineral fiber strips. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Intralok bonding agent as manufactured by W.R. Meadows. B. Non -shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non- metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7000 psi in 28 days. C. Curing compound: Chlorinated liquid rubber all resin base type; clear; manufactured by W.R. Meadows; ASTM C309 type 1, class B, clear, translucent, AR-30. D. Chemical Hardner: Pena-Lith; manufactured by W.R. Meadows. E. Sealer: Master Seal, manufactured by Master Builders. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301 except as amended by this Section. r-- 3.02 FORMWORK CACI 301 4.2> A. Apply formwork release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices and embedded parts. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings which are affected by agent. 3.03 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS CACI 301 9.0> A. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, detail and elevations. C. Repair or replace concete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair 03001-2 or replace exposed architectural concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Engineer. 3.04 FINISHING FORMED SURFACE (ACI 301.10.4) A. Provide broom finish at exposed concrete surfaces. END OF SECTION 03001-3 SECTION 04001 MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Concrete unit masonry back-up for cavity walls, complete with reinforcement and anchorages. B. Face brick for cavity wall construction, complete with angle lintels over openings. C. Mortar for masonry. D. Built-in items supplied by other trades. E. Cut and fit for other sections of work. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01031: Alteration Project Procedures. B. Section 01045: Cutting and Patching. C. Section 01100: Alternate No. 1. D. Section 08111: Standard Steel Frames. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform masonry work in accordance with requirements of ANSI A41.1 unless indicated otherwise herein. B. Perform mortar work in accordance with requirements of ASTM C476 unless indicated otherwise herein. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. B. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry purposes. C. ASTM C62 - Building Brick. (Common Brick). D. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. E. ASTM C90 - Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. F. ASTM C476 - Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry. 04001-1 G. ANSI A41.1 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry. H. ASTM C216 - Facing Brick. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's recommendations and product data in accordance with Section 01300. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 deg. F. prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. During freezing or near freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg. F. and to protect masonry work completed or in progress. Conform to all other requirements stated in Division 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY A. Concrete Blocks: ASTM C90 Hollow Core, C145 Solid Core grade N, type I; modular size complete with corners, bases, bond beams, lintels and fillers to match and compliment block units; light weight. B. Face Brick: Non -load bearing burned clay or shale to match existing face brick. Existing undamaged brick units from demolition may by utilized in new construction. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 for general use. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207 Type S. C. Aggregates: Standard masonry type, ASTM C144. D. Water: clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious material. E. Color: Mortar color shall match existing. 2.03 MORTAR MIX A. Provide minimum 1800 psi mortar for load bearing walls and partitions. B. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients, in quantities needed for immediate use. 04001-2 C. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure uniformity of mix and coloration. D. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. E. Use mortar within two (2) hours of mixing at temperatures over 80 degrees F. and two and one half (2 1/2) hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F. F. If necessary, retemper mortar within two (2) hours of mixing to replace water lost by evaporation. Do not retemper mortar after two (2) hours of mixing. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL SECTIONS (LINTELS) A. Steel Materials: ASTM A36 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ensure items built-in by other trades for this work are properly located and sized. B. Establish lines, levels .and coursing.- Protect from disturbances. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION A. Place masonry in accordance with lines and levels indicated on drawings. B. Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections. C. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint, with mortar raked back 1/4 inch regardless of joint treatment. D. Buttering corners of joints, deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. E. Do not shift or tap masonry after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.. F. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry with proper power tools to provide straight and true, unchipped edges. G. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness. Lay in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. H. Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking masonry corners. 04001-3 I. Lay concrete block in running stacked bond unless noted otherwise. Course 1 block unit and 1 mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form concave mortar joints. J. Lay brick in running bond. Course 3 brick units and 3 mortar joints to equal 8 inches. Form concave mortar joints. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit is 1/16 inch. B. Maximum variation from vertical and horizontal building line: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum variation from cross sectional thickness of composite walls: plus or minus 1/4 inch. D. Maintain flush face on exposed masonry surfaces. 3.04 LINTELS A. Place and secure steel lintel angles at locations indicated on plans. 3.05 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progesses, build -in hollow metal frame, window frames, steel angle lintels, anchor bolts, plates, and other items supplied by other trades. B. Build -in items plumb and true. C. Bed anchors of hollow metal frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar. Fill masonry cores with grout minimum 8 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build -in organic materials which will be subject to rot or deterioration. 3.06 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit concrete block for chases, pipes, conduit sleeves. Cooperate fully with other sections of work to ensure correct size, shape and location. B. Obtain Architect/Engineer's review prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on drawings,or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of masonry work. B. Point or replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. 04001-4 C. Clean soiled surfaces using a non -acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use nonmetallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION 04001-5 SECTION 06001 CARPENTRY WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Rough carpentry, finish carpentry, and cabinet work. Refer to Schedule located at the end of this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09900: Site finishing of finish carpentry and cabinetwork. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Rough carpentry lumber: Visible grade stamp, of agency certified by National Forest Products Association.(NFPA). B. When applicable, fabricate cabinetwork and site made finish carpentry items in accordance with recommendations of Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. B. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. C. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. D. PS 58 - Basic Hardwood. E. NFPA Ntional Forest Products Association National Design Specification for Wood Construction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings of Cabinetry and Millworks in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit samples of standard colors and patterns of plastic laminate for Architect/Engineers selection. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver shop fabricated carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to receive the work. Protect items from weather while in transit. 06001-1 B. Store indoors, in ventilated areas with a constant minimum. temperature of 60 deg. F. maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS A. Lumber Materials - graded in accordance with PS-20, maximum moisture content of 19%. 2.02 ROUGH CARPENTRY ACCESSORIES A. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Plain finish for interior locations; size and type to suit application. B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, Screws; medium carbon steel, sized to suit application, galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations. C. Fasteners: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete bolts or powder activated type for anchorage to steel. 2.03 FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Softwood lumber: White pine, moulding grade. B. Particle Board: 40 lb. density, industrial grade. a. C. Hardwood Plywood: PS-51 graded in accordance with AWI requirements for paint finish. Species: Birch. C. Plastic Laminate: General purpose type; minimum .050 inches thick; finish and texture as selected. D. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130A type recommended by millwork manufacturer to suit application. 2.04 FINISH CARPENTRY ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Size and type to suit application. B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinetwork and finish carpentry items in accordance with recommendations of AWI and to extent indicated in Schedule located at the end of this Section. Shop fabricate items where possible. 06001-2 B. Fit shelves, doors and exposed edges with 3/8 inch thick matching hardwood edging. Use full length pieces only. C. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Corners and joints to be hairline. Slightly bevel arrises. D. Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern. Mechanically fasten splashbacks to counter- tops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. E. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when unavoidable. F. Shop assemble cabinetwork and finish carpentry items for delivery to site in sizes easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings. 2.07 PREPARATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS AND CABINETWORK FOR FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive site applied finishes. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. B. Seal concealed surfaces. Brush apply on-ly. C. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures and fitments. Verify locations of cutouts from site dimensions. Prime paint contact surfaces of cutouts. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure cabinetwork and finish carpentry item in place rigid, plumb and secure. B. Counter -sink semi -concealed anchorage devices used to wall mount components. C. Carefully scribe cabinetwork which is against other building materials, leaving gaps of 1/32 inch maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for.this purpose. D. Install and adjust cabinet hardware to correct operation. E. Ensure that mechanical and electrical items• affecting this Section of work are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by the Architect/Engineer prior to commencement of installation. 3.02 SCHEDULE 06001-3 A. Shelving at Rooms: T 109 and T 110 (Bid Item No. 2) . B. Counter at Room T 112 (Bid Item No. 2). C. Filler panel at counter in Room D 103 (Bid Item No. 3). END OF SECTION 06001-4 SECTION 07213 BATT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Batt insulation in wall and ceiling construction. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09510 - Accoustical Ceiling: Supportive Construction. C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Wall Board Systems: Sound Insulation. 1.03 REFERENCES A. FS HH-I-521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal Mineral Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Materials of this Section shall provide a thermal and air barrier at enclosure elements. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with Section 01600. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Owens Corning. B. Manville. C. United States Gypsum. D. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation for ceilings where noted: unforced preformed glass or mineral fiber batt; Owens Corning Sonobatts; 24" x 48",6.1/4" thick. B. Batt Insulation for interior walls where noted: kraft paper faced preformed glass or mineral fiber batt; Owens Corning Thermal Batt Insulation; 3.10221thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation. B. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install batt insulation and vapor/air barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install batt insulation, vapor and air barrier in interior walls and ceiling spaces without gaps or voids. C. Trim insulation neatly t❑ fit spaces. Use Batts free of damage. D. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids. END OF SECTION 07213-2 SECTION 08110 STANDARD STEEL DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Standard type pressed steel hollow metal door(s) with flush faces, complete with glass light. B. Install hardware. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 08700: Hardware for doors and panels. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications - Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute. B. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Indicate general construction, configurations, jointing methods, reinforcements, and locations of cut-outs for glass and louvers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Republic Builders Products Corporation. B. Steelcraft. C. Kawanee Manufacturing, Inc. 2.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Materials and Fabrication: SDI-100 except as amended in this Section. B. Door Elevation Type A: Grade III Extra Heavy Duty, 16 gage steel, 1-3/4 inch thick flush panel with half glass. C. Door Elevation Type D: Grade II Heavy Duty, 18 gage steel, 1- 3/4 inch thick flush panel. 08110-1 D. Glass Section: 1/4" thick tempered, laminated safety glass 2.03 FABRICATION A. Mechanically interlock longitudinal seams of honeycomb core type doors. Leave seams invisible, or weld fill and grind smooth. B. Reinforce and prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to '-` Section 08700 for hardware requirements. , C. Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth uniform finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with SDI-100 except as amended in this Section. B. Install hollow metal doors plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/8 inch. Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08700. C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing in doors. END OF SECTION 08110-2 SECTION 08111 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Standard and fire rated pressed steel hollow metal door frames. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110: Standard Steel Doors. B. Section 08700: Finish hardware for doors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications - Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual (FM), as applicable to fire rated hollow metal door frames. C. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Indicate general construction, configurations, jointing methods, reinforcements, anchorage methods, hardware locations and installation details. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Republic Builders Products Corporation. B. Steel Craft C. Kawanee Manufacturing, Inc. 2.02 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Materials and Fabrication: SDI-100 except as amended in this Section. 08111-1 B. Types: welded frames, 16 gage. C. Mortar Guard Boxes: minimum 22 gage welded in place. D. Door Bumpers: manufacturer's standard resilient type; removable for replacement. 2.03 FIRE RATED FRAMES A. Fabricate fire rated hollow metal frames of materials in accordance with requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL). Place UL labels where visible when frames are installed in •-- position. Refer to drawings for class requirements. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Accurately form and cut mitered corners of welded type frames. Weld on inside surfaces. Grind welded joints to smooth uniform finish. B. Accurately cope and securely weld butt joints of mullions and transoms of glazed lights. Grind welded joints to smooth uniform finish. C. Reinforce and prepare frames to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for hardware requirements. D. Place minimum of 3 single silencers on single door frames and double door frames with removable mullions. Space equally along ^ strike jambs. E. Door Jamb Anchors: SDI 100. F. Fill surface depressions of hollow metal frames with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install door frames in accordance with SDI-100 except as amended in this Section. B. Install hollow metal frames plumb and square, in correct locations indicated on drawings and with a maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16 inch. Ensure frames are securely and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction. C. After installation, touch-up scratched or damaged surfaces. Use type of primer recommended for galvanized surfaces identical to that used for shop coat. D. Install fire rated frames in accordance with NFPA No. 80. 08111-2 E. In metal stud partitions, install 3 wall anchors, at }singe and strike levels. G. In existing masonry construction, set frames to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchoring devices. END OF SECTION 08111-3 SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED -. A. Aluminum doors and frames, complete with glass and glazing and finish hardware. B. Install perimeter sealants. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 08700: Supply of finish hardware, other than specified in this Section. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. B. FS TT-C-494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant. C. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and other Structures). 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and locations anchorages methods and locations hardware locations, installation details. 1.05 DELIVERY OF MATERIALS A. Deliver material in manufacturer's packaging complete with installation instructions. 1.06 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY A. Provide written guarantee in accordance with Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND SYSTEMS A. Kawneer B. Amarlite C. PPG 08120-1 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. 1-3/4" X 4" or 4" x 4" extruded aluminum frames as detailed, clear anodized finish; Kawneer TRIFAB II 400 System. B. Doors: Equal to Kawneer 350 Medium Stile. C. Glass: 1/4" thick, tempered, Solar Gray, 2.03 HARDWARE A. Weatherstripping, Sweep Strips, Closers, Butts: manufacturer's recommended standard type to suit application. B. Exit Devices: Equal to Kawneer "Dor-o-matic 990" <each leaf). C. Push/Pulls: G-2 pulls. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum doors and frames to allow for clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assemblies to enable installation. Provide for thermal movement. B. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit door and frame assemblies in place. C. Accurately and rigidly fit together joints and corners. Match components ensuring continuity of line and design. Ensure joints and connections are flush, hair line and weatherproof. D. Provide for moisture entering joints and condensation occuring within frame construction to drain to exterior. E. Make provisions for hardware and provide required internal reinforcing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install aluminum door(s) and frame(s) in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure assemblies are plumb, level and free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerance: and alignment with adjacent work. B. Use sufficient anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten door and frame assemblies to building. C. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper templates. Refer to Section O800 for installation requirements. D. Install perimeter sealaht and related backing materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 08120-2 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Solid core flush wood doors with veneer faces. B. Fire rated solid core flush wood doors with veneer faces. C. Install door hardware. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 08111: Hollow metal frames. B. Section 08700: Door hardware. ..a 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Indicate general construction, jointing methods and hardware "^ locations. 1.05 GUARANTY/WARRANTY A. Provide written guarantee in accordance with Section 01700. B. Guarantee: Provide for replacing (including cost of rehanging and refinishing) at no cost to the Owner, wood doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship including warp and de - lamination within minimum period of 5 years from date of substantial completion of the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Valter Door Company. B. Weyerhauser Architectural Door. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 08210-1 2. 02 DOOR TYPE (S) A. Flush faced wood doors. 2.03 DOORS A. Flush Interior Doors. 1. Elevation Type C: 1 3/4 inches thick; solid core construction with red oak species face veneers for transparent finish; custom grade face veneers; plain slice with book.match. 2. Elevation Type E: 1 3/4 inches thick; solid core construction with birch species face veneers for paint finish; custom grade face veneers; plain slice with book match. 3. Elevation Type F: 1 3/4 inches thick; solid core construction with walnut species face veneers for transparent finish; custom grade face veneers; plain slice with book match. B. Fire Rated Flush Doors: Refer to drawings for UL label requirements. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate standard type doors in accordance with requirements of AWI Quality Standards. B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). C. Provide doors with minimum 1/4 inch thick edge strips, of wood species to match face veneers. D. Make cut-outs and provide stops for glass and louvers. E. Bevel strike edge of single acting doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches. Radius strike edge of double acting swing doors 2-1/8 inches. F. Prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for hardware requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wood doors plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/8 inch. Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08700. END OF SECTION 08210-2 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Hardware for scheduled exterior and interior doors, other than specified in specific door sections. B. Thresholds and weatherstripping for scheduled exterior doors. C. Furnishing and installation of replacement hardware for restricted keyway system for total Municipal Square facility. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110: Hollow metal doors. B. Section 08120: Aluminum Doors and Frames 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A115.1 - Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Door Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. B. ANSI A115.2 - Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. C. ANSI A115.5 - Frame Preparation for 181 and 190 Series Deadlock Strikes. D. ANSI A115.9 - Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single Acting. E. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. F. ANSI A156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim. G. ANSI A156.3 - Exit Devices. H. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls (Closers). 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. C. Supply templates to door and frame manufacturer(s) to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cut outs for hardware. 08700-1 D. Submit schedule for replacement hardware for new restricted keyway Grand Master System. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide Owner with manufacturers' parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper maintenance of hardware. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HARDWARE A. Provide items as listed in schedule at end of this section, complete to function as intended. B. Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with Section 01600. C. All cylinders shall be compatible with new building master key system established as part of this Work. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. See Hardware Schedule for type and manufacturer. 2.03 KEYING A. Provide 3 keys for each lock. B. Provide 10 keys for each master and grandmaster key system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper templates. B. Maintain following mounting heights for scheduled doors, from finished floor to center line of hardware item: 1. Bottom Hinge 9" to 13" 2. Top Hinge 7" to 11" from top of door 3. Intermediate Hinges Equidistant between top & Bottom hinge. 4. Knob Lock Strikes 40 - 5/16" 5. Dead Lock Strikes 60" 6. Exit Device Strikes 40 - 5/16" 7. Push Plates 42 to 48" 8. Pull Handles 40" to 45" C. Bid Alternate No. 3 - New Grand Master Key System: Install replacement hardware to provide restricted keyway system for 08700-2 Municipal Square. All cylinders to be factory restricted keyway established for use by the City of Lubbock with factory controlled distribution of key section. Supplier shall verify and schedule quantities, finish, specific function, as required to replace existing locking hardware. Establish new Grand Master Key System as directed by Owner. Bid shall include allotment indicated in Hardware Schedule (Item 10). D. Adjustments in final quantities of hardware shall be made in accordance with Unit Prices. 3.02 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. See Hardware Schedule following the end of this Section. END OF SECTION 08700-3 H A R D W A R E E C H E D u L E ITEM 1 DOORS MARKED 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, & 9 EACH TO HAVE: 2 EA. SARGENT EXIT DEVICES 8710 X 306 US32D ITEM 2 DOORS MARKED 5 EACH TO HAVE: 2 EA. SARGENT CYLINDERS 41/34 US26D ITEM 3 DOORS MARKED 6 EACH TO HAVE: 1 EA. ROTON CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-224 HD 1 EA. SARGENT EXIT DEVICE 8804 PTB US32D 1 EA. SARGENT CLOSER EN1230-P9 1-EA. TRIMCO KICKPLATE 10" X 2" LDW US32D 1 EA. PEMKO THRESHOLD 170A 1 EA. PEMKO DOOR BOTTOM 18A-062 1 EA. PEMKO WEATHERSTRIPPING 45A-062 ITEM 4 DOORS MARKED 17, 19, 20, 33, 35 EACH TO HAVE: 1-1/2 PR. MCKINNEY BUTTS TA2714 US26D 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 1 EA. SARGENT LOCKSET 7705 EX US26D 1 EA. TRIMCO STOP 1276CS US32D 3 EA. TRIMCO SILENCERS 1229A ITEM 5 DOORS MARKED 21, 29, 30, 34 EACH TO HAVE: 1-1/2 PR. MCKINNEY BUTTS 1502 US26D 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 2 PR. MCKINNEY BUTTS 1502 US26D 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 (DOOR 34 ONLY) 1 EA. SARGENT LOCKSET 7705 BM US26D 1 EA. TRIMCO STOP 1276CS US32D 3 EA. TRIMCO SILENCERS 1229A ITEM 6 DOORS MARKED 22, 23 EACH TO HAVE: 3 PR. MCKINNEY BUTTS TA2714 US26D 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 2 EA. TRIMCO FLUSHBOLTS 3913 US26D 1 EA. TRIMCO DUST PROOF STRIKE 3910 US26D 1 EA. SARGENT LOCKSET 7705 BM US26D 2 EA. TRIMCO SILENCERS 1229A ,., ITEM 7 (ALTERNATE NO. 1) DOORS MARKED 24 EACH TO HAVE: 1-1/2 PR. MCKINNEY BUTTS TA2714 US26D 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 1 EA. SARGENT EXIT DEVICE 8804 PTB US32D 1 EA. SARGENT CLOSER EN1230-P9 1 EA. TRIMCO KICKPLATE 10" X 2" LDW US32D 1 EA. PEMKO THRESHOLD 170A 1 EA. PEMKO DOOR BOTTOM 18A-062 1 EA. PEMKO WEATHERSTRIPPING 45A-062 ITEM 8 (ALTERNATE NO. 2) DOORS MARKED 28 EACH TO HAVE: 3 PR. MCKINNEY BUTTS TA2714 US26D 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 1 EA. SARGENT EXIT DEVICE 8710 X STS US32D X 815 1 EA. SARGENT EXIT DEVICE 8963 X STS US32D 2 EA. SARGENT CLOSERS EN1230-PH9 2 EA. TRIMCO KICKPLATE 10" X 2" LDW US32D 2 EA. TRIMCO SILENCERS 1229A ITEM 9 DOORS MARKED 32 EACH TO HAVE: 3 PR. STANLEY BUTTS FBB179 US26D 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 2 EA. TRIMCO FLUSHBOLTS 3917-12" US26D 1 EA. SARGENT LOCKSET 7705 BM US26D -- 1 EA. TRIMCO VIEWER 975 US26D 2 EA. TRIMCO STOPS 1210ES US26D 2 EA. TRIMCO SILENCERS 1229A ITEM 10 (ALTERNATE NO. 3) BID ALLOTMENT FOR REKEY OF TOTAL MUNICIPAL SQUARE FACILITY: (IN ADDITION TO ITEMS 1 THRU 9) 2 EA. SARGENT CYLINDERS 41/34 US26D 7 EA. SARGENT RIM CYLINDERS 34 X 97 110 EA. SARGENT MORTISE CYLINDERS 41 X 90-1/4 X 97 170 EA. SARGENT MASTER RING MORTISE CYLINDERS 41 X 99 X 90-1/4 - 170 EA. SCHLAGE MASTER RING BUSHING B202-339 170 EA. SCHLAGE MASTER RING CAMS B502-486 40 EA. SARGENT CYLINDERICAL LOCKSETS 7G05 BC _. 10 EA. MAG ENG CYLINDERICAL LOCK KITS 4 500 EA. SARGENT BLANK KEYS SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Glass and glazing for aluminum door, transoms and fixed glass. B. Glass and glazing for hollow metal work doors and windows. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110: Standard Steel Doors. B. Section 08111: Standard Steel Frames. C. Section 08210: Wood Doors. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. FS DD-G-451 - Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Figured, Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses. D. FS DD-G-1403 - Glass, Plate, Float, Sheet, Figured, and Spandrel Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered. E. FS TT-S-230 - Sealing Compound: Synthetic Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically Curing for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Building Construction. F. FS TT-S-1543 - Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures. G. FGMA - Glazing Manual, Glazing Sealing Systems Manual. 1.05 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01300. 08800-1 B. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitation, special handling or installation requirements. C. Provide data on glazing sealant. Identify colors available. 1.06 CERTIFICATES A. Submit sealed glass unit manufacturer's certificate in accordance with Section 01300 indicating units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to site in accordance with Section 01600. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty in accordance with Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE GLASS MANUFACTURERS A. PPG Industries, Glass Div. B. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. C. Ford Motor Co. Glass Div. D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: FS DD-G-451; Type 1, Class 1, quality. B. Safety Glass: FS DD-G-1403 fully tempered laminated. 2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinylchloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this Section. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION oppm -A A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses. 3.03 EXTERIOR DRY METHOD PREFORMED GLAZING A. Cut glazing spline to length; install on glass pane. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. C. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane. D. Install removable stops without displacement of glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.04 INTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops. Projecting 1/16 inch above sightline. B. Place setting blocks at 1/3 points. C. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane. D. Install removable stops, spacer shims, inserted between glass and applied stops at 24" o.c., 1/4" below sightline. E. Fill gap between pane and applied stop with sealant to a depth equal to bite of frame on pane to uniform and level line. F. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.05 CLEANING A. After installation, mark pane with an "X" by using plastic tape or removable paste. B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. C. Remove labels after work is completed. D. Wash and polish glass, both faces, not earlier than 4 days prior to date scheduled for final inspection for establishing substantial completion. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning. END OF SECTION 08800-3 SECTION 09210 GYPSUM PLASTER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Three coat gypsum plaster with hand applied finish coat. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01045: Cutting and Patching. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C28 - "Gypsum Plasters". B. ANSI A42.1 - "Spec. for Gypsum Plastering". 1.04 ENVIRONMETAL CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where work of this Section is being performed, so as to allow gypsum plaster to properly cure. Take all precautionary measures necessary to ensure that excess temperature changes do not occur. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLASTER BASE COAT MATERIALS A. U.S.G. Structo-Lite Gypsum Plaster 2.02 FINISHING PLASTER A. U.S.G. Structo-Lite Gypsum Plaster 2.03 METAL ACCESSORIES A. Refer to Section 09205 - Metal Furring and Lathing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify that demolition and removal of existing loose, cracked and peeling plaster is complete, and that opening to be repaired in existing plaster is cut straight and clean. B. Ensure mechanical and electrical services within walls and/or ceiling have been tested and approved, prior to application. 09210-1 C. Ensure grounds and blocking within walls for other sections of work have been installed. D. Where necessary, wet concrete block surfaces to reduce excessive suction. Ensure mortar joints are flush. E. Clean concrete surfaces of all dust, laitance, efflorescence, loose particles, grease or other foreign matter. Thoroughly wet surfaces before using acid solutions, solvents or detergents to perform cleaning. Thoroughly wash surfaces with clean water immediately following use. .... F. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces which are to receive bonding plaster, so as to allow adequate adhesion. In lieu of bonding plaster, use a bonding agent. Apply on concrete in accordance with manufactuer's recommendations, ensuring complete coverage. G. Ensure that all new metal lath systems are properly installed. 3.02 PLASTER MIXING A. Mix and proportion plaster in accordance with good trade practice and as recommended by local Lath and Plaster Insitute. 3.03 PLASTERING A. Apply gypsum plaster as recommended by Local Lath and Plaster Institute. Use the three coat system over metal lathed, masonry and concrete surfaces. B. Apply finish coat to minimum 1/8 inch thickness. *- C. Maintain surface flatness, with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft. 3.04 FINISH A. Match existing sand finish. END OF SECTION 09210-2 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Blocking. B. Gypsum board. C. Taped and sanded joint treatment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Frames: Hollow metal frames. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Textured finish. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform gypsum wallboard systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 and GA 216 unless otherwise specified in this Section. B. Keep copy of GA 216 in field office for duration of project. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Partitions: Listed and labeled by UL. 1.05 REFERENCES A. GA 216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. B. ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water - Resistant Backing Board. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum Drywall Products 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Gold Bond Building Products 3. The Flintkote Company B. Metal Framing & Accessories 1. United States Gypsum Co. 09260-1 2. Gold Bond Building Products 3. The Flintkote Company. 2.02 METAL FRAMING �., A. Provide metal framing materials in accordance with GA 216. B. Studs: Screw -type Cee-shaped 25 gage. P" C. Runners: Match studs. D. Blocking: nominal 2 inch thick wood. 2.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Provide gypsum wallboard materials in accordance with recommendations of GA 216. B. Standard Gypsum Board: 5/8 inch thick; 1/4" thick where designated on plans; maximum permissible length(s); ends square cut, tapered edges. 2.06 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Provide gypsum wallboard accessories in accordance with GA 216. B. Corner Beads: Metal. M., C. Edge Trim: LC bead, L bead, LK bead, U exposed reveal bead. D. Reinforcing tape, Joint compound, Adhesive, Water, Fasteners: GA 216. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 METAL FRAMING ERECTION - GENERAL A. Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754 B. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 3.02 METAL STUD ERECTION A. Metal Studs: Spacing- 16" o. c. unless otherwise noted. B. Partition Heights: To above suspended ceilings unless noted or detailed otherwise. C. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install runners on each side of opening at frame head height between jamb studs and adjacent studs. 09260-2 D. Blocking: Nail wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of millwork as required. E. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind partition framing. Allow such items to be installed after framing is complete. 3.03 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with recommendations of GA 216. B. Erect single layer standard gypsum board perpindicular to framing, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. D. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical lengths. Place edge trim where gypsum board abutts dissimilar materials and where gypsum board abutts window and door. E. Tape, fill, and sand exposed ,joints, edges, corners, openings and fixings. to produce surface ready to receive surface finishes. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. F. Remove and re -do defective work. END OF SECTION 09260-3 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Non -fire rated suspended metal grid system complete with wall and bulkhead trim. B. Lay -in ceiling tiles, panels. C. Prefinished fabric covered wall panels. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16510: Lighting Fixtures within ceiling system. B. Section 15870.01: Air Diffusers within ceiling system. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product description literature in accordance with Section 01300. 1.04 GRID .PATTERN REQUIREMENTS A. Grid pattern shall shall be continuous and unbroken within perimeter walls of entire area receiving new ceiling, I.E., grid pattern shall continue over the top of demountable walls. Refer to Drawings for grid pattern layout. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Ceiling Panels: 1. United States Gypsum 2. Celotex 3. Armstrong B. Suspension Grid System: 1. Chicago Metallic 2. Donn Corporation .� 3. Armstrong C. Prefinished fabric covered wall panels: 1. Armstrong 2. Conwed 3. United States Gypsum ^- 2.02 ACOUSTICAL CEILING 09510-1 A. 2X4 Lay -in panels: USG No. 135 B. 2X2 Lay -in panels: USG No. 707 2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Type and manufacturer: Chicago Metallic conforming to ASTM C- 635 heavy duty system. B. Grid: Non -fire rated exposed tee, all components die -cut and interlocking. C. Reveal Edge Molding: Match existing at Communications Center Bid Item No. 4. 2.04 PREFINISHED FABRIC COVERED WALL PANELS A. Armstrong Soundsoak Encore Collection. 3t4" thick, 30" wide, concealed spline mounting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical ceiling system(s) in accordance with manufacturer's.recommendations to produce finished ceiling true to lines and levels and free from warped, soiled or damaged grid or lay -in panels. B. Install ceiling system(s) in a manner capable of supporting all superimposed loads, with maximum permissable deflection of 1t36O of span and maximum surface deviation of 1t8 inch in 10 ft. C. Install after major above -ceiling work is complete. Co- ordinate the location of hangers with other work. Ensure the layout of hangers are located to accommodate fittings and units of equipment which are to be placed after the installation of ceiling grid system(s). D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as required to span the required distance. E. Hang independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the longitudinal axis or face plane of adjacent members. F. Do not support fixtures from or on main runners or cross runners if weight of the fixture causes the total dead load to exceed the deflection capability. In such cases, support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support the fixture- independently. O9510-2 G. Do not install fixtures so that main runners and cross runners will be eccentrically loaded. Where fixture installation would produce rotation of runners, provide stabilizer bars. H. Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum lengths, straight, true to line and level. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other ceiling finishes. I. Fit acoustic lay -in panels in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental -to appearance and function. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces. J. Install lay -in panels level, in uniform plane and free from twist, warp and dents. K. Install fabric covered wall panels with concealed splines over 1x4 furring strips applied horizontally at 24 inches on center. .-.. 3.02 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust any sags or twists which develop in the ceiling system(s) and replace any part which is damaged or faulty. END OF SECTION 09510-3 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Preparation of substrate surfaces. B. Application of vinyl composition tile. C. Cleaning of all surfaces and areas of work. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01031: Alteration Project Procedures. B. Section 01045: Cutting and Patching. C. Section 02072: Minor Demolition for Remodeling. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS SS-T-312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Composition 1 - asbestos -free B. FS SS-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic. 1.04 SAMPLES A. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300. B. Include duplicate 9 X 9 sized samples of.each flooring material, color and pattern selected. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300. B. Describe floor pattern, scaled design, color of various materials and location of floor accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Vinyl Composition Tile. 1. GAF Corporation 2. Azrock Floor Products 3. Kentile Floor 09650-1 B. Vinyl Base 1. Burke Flooring Products. r" 2. Johnson Rubber Co. 3. Flexco, Division of Textile Rubber Co. 2.02 FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Conforming to FS SS-T-312 type IV; mottled 12 X 12 inch size x 1/8 inch thick; color selected by Architect/Engineer. 2.03 BASE MATERIALS A. Base: Conforming to FS SS-W-30 Type II vinyl; top set coved, toeless, 4 inch high, 1/8 inch thick including premolded end stops and external corners color as selected, manufactured by Azrock. 2.04 ACCESSORIES/ADHESIVES/SEALERS A. Tile and Carpet Joiner: Flexco No. 64 B. Sub -Floor Filler: White premix latex, mix with water to produce cementitious paste. C. Primers and Adhesives- Waterproof; of types recommend by resilient flooring manufacturer for specific material. D. Sealer and Wax: Type recommended by resilient flooring material manufacturer for material type and location. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE AND SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Ensure concrete floors are dry (maximum 7% moisture content) and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization or dusting. C. Maintain minimum 70 deg. F. air temperature at flooring installation area for 3 days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation. D. Store flooring materials in area of application. Allow 3 days -� for material to reach equal temperature as area. . 3.02 LEVELLING A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects with sub -floor filler. 09650-2 B. Clean floor and apply, trowel and float filler to leave. smooth, flat hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. 3.03 INSTALLATION - FLOORING A. Open floor tile cartons, enough to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area. B. Clean substrate. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of flooring before initial set. C. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to ensure full adhesion. D. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce minimum number of seams, symmetrical tile pattern. E. Install with minimum tile width 1/2 full size at room or area perimeter, to square grid pattern with all joints aligned and with pattern grain alternating with adjacent unit to produce basket weave pattern. F. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door opening(s) where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.04 INSTALLATION - BASE A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. Use premolded sections for external corners and exposed ends. C. Install base on solid backing. Adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. E. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 48 hours after installation. 3.07 CLEAN-UP 09650-3 A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 09650-4 SECTION 09688 CARPET GLUE DOWN PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare surfaces to receive carpeting. B. Apply glue down carpeting on floor surfaces where indicated, complete with required accessories. C. Install new vinyl base at all areas to receive new carpeting. D. Install edge strips where carpeting terminates at other floor finishes. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling 1.03 REFERENCES A. FS DDD-C-0095.- Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic, Polyester, Polypropylene. B. FS SS-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Clearly indicate the location of all seams, method of joining seams, direction of carpet, type of adhesive to be used, method of integrating edge strips with carpet, and installation procedures. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for flame\fuel\smoke rating requirements of carpet and base in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not commence with carpet installation until all ceilings and overhead work, have been tested, approved, and completed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Mohawk Commercial Carpet, Style: New Supertron. 09688-1 B. Bigelow Carpet Company, Style: Regents Row Highlights. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Woven Carpet: Such as those listed under 2.01 of this Section or conforms to the following criteria: Texture Cut and Loop Pile or Loop Pile Static Control Fiber 100% Dupont Antron Continuous filament Nylon with Static Control. Yarn Minimum 4 Ply Pitch 165 P.O.B. Mininum Rows per inch 8 Minimum Max. ES Charge Less than 3.5 Rv @ 20% R.H. Pile Height .230" minimum loop Face Weight 30 oz/sq yd. F= Primary Backing Synthetic Roll Width 12 ft. Dye Method Singles, Yarn Dyed and Space Color As Selected B. Base Material: Conforming to FS SS-W-40 Type II vinyl; top sset coved, 4 inch high, 1/8 inch thick including premolded end stops and external corner, color as selected. Azrock, VPI, Roppe, or Equal. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sub -Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended by carpet manufacturer. C. Edge Strips: Rubber type, color as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION 09688-2 A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster, and other substances detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to thoroughly dry. B. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet noncumulative. C. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler. D. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. E. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. F. Vacuum floor surface. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Architect/Engineer approval. B. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation between dye lots. C. Cut carpet, where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight and true and unfrayed. D. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic. E. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract from the appearance of the carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked and free of gaps. F. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer after primer application to ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set. G. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. H. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening. I. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces. J. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no base is scheduled, leaving no gaps. K. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of 24 hours or until adhesive is set. 09688-3 L. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor, well fastened at edges, and present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area. M. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove access adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION 09688-4 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare surfaces which are to receive finish. B. Paint all previously painted surfaces in Meeting Rooms No. 212 and 214 (Part 1). Q, Fini--h a-- iTtdtQated iTt plaL7-�_- aLd achedulas (Parts 2 and 3). D. Touch up existing surfaces as required and finish new doors (Part 4). E. Finish surfaces; ,as indicated in schedule at end of this section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling 1.03 COLOR SELECTIONS A. Colors to be selected by Architect/Engineer prior to commencement of work. 1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Leave on premises, where directed by Architect/Engineer, not less than one gallon of each color used. B. Containers to be tightly sealed and clearly labelled for identification. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint materials in sealed original labelled containers, bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. B. Provide adequate storage facilities. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. in well ventilated area. C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustions. 09900-1 9 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Ensure surface temperatures or the surrounding air temperature is above 40 degrees F. before applying finishes. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints for interior work is 45 degrees F and 50 degrees F for exterior work. Minimum application temperature for varnish finishes is 65 degrees F. B. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes. C. Provide minimum 60 foot candles of lighting on surfaces to be finished. 1.07 PROTECTION A. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection. B. Place cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. C. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and -, fastenings, prior to painting operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Sherwin Williams Company B. PPG Industries, Inc. C. Kelly Moore Paints 2.02 MATERIALS A. Paint, Varnish, Stain, Enamel, Lacquer and Fillers: Type and brand listed herein or equivalent products approved by Architect/Engineer. �^ B. Paint Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not specifically indicated herein but required to achieve the finishes specified of high quality and approved manufacturer. C. Paints: Ready -mixed except field catalysed coatings. Pigments fully ground maintaining a soft paste consistency, capable of readily and uniformly dispersed to a complete homogeneous mixture. r- 09900-2 D. Paints to have good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of dry or curing free of streaks or sags. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted prior t❑ commencement of work. Report in writing to Architect/Engineer, any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Do not commence until such defects have been corrected. B. Correct defect and deficiencies in surfaces which may adversely affect work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. B. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. C. Remove mildew, by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry completely. D. Remove contamination from gypsum wallboard surfaces and prime to show defects, if any. Paint after defects have been remedied. E. Fill Hairline cracks, small holes and imperfections on plaster surfaces with patching plaster. Smooth off to match adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces where they occur. F. Remove grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust from steel and iron surfaces. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing, scraping or any other necessary method. Ensure steel surfaces are satisfactory before paint finishing. 3.03 APPLICATIONS A. Apply each coat at proper consistency. B. Each coat of paint is to be slightly darker than preceeding coat unless otherwise approved by Architect/Engineer. C. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. D. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. E. Allow each coat of finish to dry before following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. 09900-3 0 F. Primer top and bottom edges of wood and metal doors with enamel undercoat when they are to be painted. 3.04 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to mechanical and electrical sections with respect to painting and finishing requirements. 3.05 CLEANING A. As work proceeds and upon completion, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed or spattered. B. During progress of work keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris. C. Upon completion of work leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of Architect/Engineer. 3.06 PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE A. Exterior Metal Doors and Frames: 1 Coat PPG Speedhide Inhibitive Primer, 6-209 2 coats PPG Speedhide Interior -Exterior Enamel, 6-252 B. Exterior Ferrous Metals: 1 Coat PPG Speedhide Inhibitive Red Primer, 6-208 2 Coats PPG Speedhide Alkyd Gloss Enamel C. Interior New Drywall: Aggregated USG Texture %II Drywall Surfacer 1 Coat PPG Quick Drying Latex Primer -Sealer, 6-2 �- 2 Coats PPG Satinhide Lo-Lustre Enamel, 20 line D. Interior Previously Painted Drywall: Prepare surface 1 Coat PPG Quick Drying Latex Primer -Sealer, 6-2 over patched areas. 2 Coats PPG Satinhide Lo-Lustre Enamel, 20 line E. Interior New Plaster: 1 Coat PPG Quick Drying Latex Primer -Sealer, 6-1 2 Coats PPG Satinhide Lo-Lustre Enamel, 20 line F. Interior Previously Painted Plaster: Prepare surface 1 Coat PPG Quick Drying Latex Primer -Sealer, 6-1 over patched areas. 2 Coats PPG Satinhide Lo-Lustre Enamel, 20 line G. Interior Painted Woodwork and Trim: 1 Coat PPG Speedhide Water Base White Undercoater, 6-755 2 Coats PPG Satinhide Latex Lo-Lustre Wall & Trim Enamel, 88 Line 09900-4 H. Interior Woodwork for Transparent Finish: 1 Coat Rez Semi -Transparent Alkyd -Oil Interior Stain, 77-302 2 Coats Rez Polyurethane Satin Clear Plastic Interior Coating, 77-9 A. Interior Previously Painted Metal: Prepare surface. 2 Coats PPG Satinhide Lo-Lustre Enamel, 20-6 END OF SECTION 09900-5 SECTION 10000 SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Writing board B. Shelf standards and supports 1.02 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit manufacturers product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Data to illustrate each accessory at large scale and show installation method. PART 2 PRODUCTS •-- 2.01 CATALOG NUMBERS A. Manufacturers and catalog numbers specified herein are for the purpose of establishing design and quality. 2.02 LOCATIONS A. Refer to drawings for locations and quantities required. 2.03 WRITING BOARD A. Claridge Model LCS-2048-W. 2.04 SHELF STANDARDS AND BRACKETS A. Knape & Vogt 87-186 Extra Heavy Duty Standards and Brackets, 72" standards, 10" brackets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION 10000-1 SECTION 12512 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Louver blinds. B. Operating hardware. 1.02 RELATED WORK 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal aluminum slat louver blinds with controls installed on interior side of window. 1.04 SAMPLES A. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300. B. Provide two 12 inch blind slats in color and finish for color selection. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Indicate at large scale, installation of blind at each type of window, the method of attachment, clearances and operation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver blinds to site wrapped and crated in a manner to prevent damage to components or marring of surfaces. B. Store in a clean, dry area, lay flat and block off ground to prevent sagging, twisting or warping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Levelor Lorentzen, Inc., Riviera Model. B. Kirsh Co. C. Bali Blinds. D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 12512-1 2.02 LOUVERED BLINDS A. Louvered blinds: 1 inch wide, .010 inch thick, spring tempered prefinished aluminum horizontal slats with matching valance, cord lift, tilt control wand and accessories. B. Finish: Manufacturers pre-treatment and baked enamel finish. Color as selected by Architect/Engineer. r., PART 3 EXECUTION A. Provide necessary measurements to blind manufacturer for each size opening to receive blinds. B. Provide necessary measurements and templates to other trades as required to correctly prepare window for blind installation. C. Notify Architect/Engineer in writing of any discrepancies which would affect proper installation and operation of blind system. Install after discrepancies are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install louvered blinds in window to manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Secure in place with flush, countersunk mechanical fasteners. C. Adjust all parts for smooth operation. END OF SECTION 12512-2 SECTION 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Work of this comprises mechanical, plumbing and electrical system construction for Renovation of Traffic Engineering Department for the City of Lubbock. 1.02 General A. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specification for the general construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as in- dicated on the General Plans in accordance with the Specifications. B. Order of Precedence shall be observed in laying out pipe, ductwork, material and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewer and storm drain lines. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose rout- ing is not critical and whose function would not be im- paired by bends and offsets. C. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material or equipment. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Division 1 - Special Conditions of the Contract. 15000-1 October 15, 1990 * Allied Associates 1.04 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. The Contractor will be responsible for all permits and in- spections required by law for the completion of his work. Cost of all permits and inspections shall be paid by the contractor. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all cer- tificates of approval, which must be delivered to the Ar- chitect before final acceptance of the job. All materials and laborfurnished by the contractor shall be in strict ac- cordance with the rules and regulations and requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, State and Municipal regulations and other authorities who may have lawful jusis- °� diction over the work being done 1.05 COORDINATION .., A. Coordinate work of the various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of �-- construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; cooperate with work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for install- ing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagramatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and con- duits, as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, r` ducts, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Execute cutting and patching to integrate elements of Work, uncover ill-timed, defective, and non -conforming work, provide openings for penetrations of existing surfaces. Seal penetrations through floors, walls, and ceilings. 1.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS A: For products specified by association or trade standards, ,,. comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by ap- plicable codes. B. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the Bid date, or date of Owner-Contracor Agreement when there are no bids, except when a specific date is specified. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Docu- ments. Maintain copy at jobsite during progress of the specific work. ,.. 15000-2 October 15, 1990 * Allied Associates 1.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other work. 2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work. B. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surround- ings; devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. C. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be ex- posed by uncovering work; maintain excavations free of water. D. At penetrations of fire -rated wall, ceiling, or floor con- struction, completely seal voids with fire -rated, fire- resistant material, full thickness of the construction ele- ment. 1.08 SUBMITTAL A. Shop Drawings 1. Present in a clear and thorough manner. 2. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or critical features or Work or products. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying dimen- sions, sizes and quantities. Architect/Engineer will check for design, construction and capacities only. Any changes required due to the failure of the Contractor to verify dimensions, sizes or quantities, will be made at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Product Data 1. Submit only pages which are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products. Show reference standards, performance charac- teristics, and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes. 2. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. Delete information not applicable. C. Do not begin work which requires submittals until return of submittal with Architect/Engineer acceptance. D. Provide number of copies required by contractor plus number requested by Architect plus one copy to be retained by En- gineer. E. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals; identify changes made since previous submittal. 1.09 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards of the region except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indi- cate more precise workmanship. B. Provide suitably qualified personnel to produce Work of specified quality. 15000-3 October 15, 1990 * Allied Associates r C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S INFORMATION A. Require compliance with instructions in full detail, includ- ing each step in sequence. B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. C. When required in individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's certificate, in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements, executed by responsible officer. D. When required in individual Specifications section, have manufacturer supplier provide qualified representative to observe field conditions, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment test, adjust, and balance of equipment. 1.11 TRANSPORTATION & HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS A. Require supplier to package finished products in boxes or crates for protection during shipment, handling, and storage. Protect sensitive products against exposure to ele- ments and moisture. B. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion, and other damage. C. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construc- tion progress schedules. Allow time for inspection prior to installation. D. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging and sur- rounding surfaces. E. Handle product by methods to avoid bending or overstressing. Lift large and heavy components only at designated lift points. 1.12 STORAGE & PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT & MATERIAL A. Store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact. Protect until installed. B. Arrange storage in a manner to provide access for main- tenance of stored items and for inspection. C. Store products, subject to damage by the elements, in sub- stantial weathertight enclosures. D. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected; that any weathering of finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract Documents. E. For mechanical equipment in long-term storage, provide manufacturer's service instructions to accompany each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of package. 15000-4 October 15, 1990 * Allied Associates 1.13 PRODUCT OPTIONS & SUBSTITUTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards. B. Products Specified by Naming Several Manufacturers: Products of named manufacturers meeting specifications; no options, no substitutions. C. Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer: No op- tion; no substitution allowed. D. Products Specified by Naming one or more manufactureres with "or equal" or "Substitutions allowed" clause: Contractor shall determine adequacy of intended substitution prior to bidding of project, no prior approval will be issued by en- gineer. 1.14 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS A. In addition to requirements in General Conditions, Maintain at the site for Owner one record copy of: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents in Field Office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents. C. Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry and legible condi- tion. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. D. Keep Record. Documents available for inspection by Architect/Engineer. 1.15 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record information on a set of blue line opaque drawings. B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information. C. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is re- corded. D. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of under- ground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appur- tenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by Modifications. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. E. At Contract closeout, deliver Record Documents under provi- sions of Division 1. 15000-5 October 15, 1990 * Allied Associates 1.16 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE DATA A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. B. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and sys- tem, with typed description of product and major component ^" parts of equipment. C. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. D. For Each Product or System: List names , addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. E. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to instal- lation; delete inapplicable information. F. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of ,. component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. G. Include as -installed color coded wiring diagrams. H. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble -shooting; disassembly, repair, and reas- sembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. J. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance in- structions. K. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. L. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. 1.17 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Before final inspection, instruct Owner's designated person- nel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, _. equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within six months. B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis of instruc- tion. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Main- tenance Manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.18 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials specified in individual sections to be provided to Owner, in addition to that re- quired for completion of Work. B. Coordinate with Owner: Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at Project site and obtain receipt prior to final pay- ment. Owner will handle and store products. 1,5000-6 October 15, 1990 * Allied Associates C. For portions of Project accepted and occupied by Owner prior to Substantial Completion, deliver a proportional part of spare products to Owner; obtain receipt. _ 1.19 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "provide", "furnish and install" or other — similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and con- nected under this division of the specification, complete for operation unless specifically noted otherwise. B. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition of the contract. C. "This section" always refers to the section in which the — statement occurs. D. "The project" includes all work in progress during the con- sturction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION 15000-7 October 15, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering SECTION 15030 TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED ^- A. Perform specified services with Contractor's qualified per- sonnel, or employ and pay for a qualified organization to perform specified services. B. Balancing of Electrical System. C. Balancing of H.V.A.C. System. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 15010: Starting of Systems. B. Section 15000: General Provisions Mechanical & Electrical. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Perform testing of H.V.A.C. equipment, balancing of dis- tribution system and adjustment of terminal devices of HVAC systems of Project. B. Perform balancing of branch panels and distribution panel boards. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable procedures and standards of the cer- tification sponsoring association; either: 1. "National Standards for Field Measurements and In- strumentation, Total Systems Balance, Air-Distribution- Hydronics Systems", dated 1974 by AABC. 2. "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems", dated January 1977, by NEBB. 3. Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accord with requirements of the standards, and calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for ex- amination. 4. Accuracy of measurements shall comply with requirements r., of the standards. 1.05 SUBMITTALS; AIR BALANCING A. At least fifteen days prior to Contractor's request for final inspection, submit three copies of final reports, on applicable reporting forms, for review. 1. Schedule testing and balancing of parts of the systems which is delayed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other conditions beyond control of the Contractor, as early as the proper conditions will allow, after consultation with Architect/Engineer. 15030-1 �' October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering 2. Submit reports of delayed testing promptly after execu- tion of those services. 3. Form of Final Reports: a. Each individual final reporting form must bear the signature of the person who recorded data and that of the TAB supervisor of the reporting organization. b. Identify instruments of all types which were used, and last date of calibration of each. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Prior to start of testing, adjusting and balancing, verify that required "Job Conditions" are met: 1. Systems installation is complete and in full operation. 2. Outside conditions are within a reasonable range rela- tive to design conditions. 3. Lights are turned "on" when lighting is included in the cooling load. B. Verify that requirements for preparation for testing and balancing have been met for elements of each of the systems which require testing. 1.07 AIR BALANCING A. Make measurements in accord with recognized procedures and practices of the certifying association. B. Measure air volume discharged at each outlet and adjust air outlets to design air volumes within ten percent over or un- der. C. Measure and adjust air supply and exhaust fan units to deliver design conditions at 100% cooling. D. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. E. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. F. Evaluate building and room pressure conditions to determine adequate supply and return air conditions. G. Evaluate space and zone temperature conditions to determine adequate performance of the systems to maintain temperatures without draft. H. Mark balancing dampers and cocks. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate services with the work of the various trades to ensure rapid completion of the services. B. Promptly report to Architect/Engineer any deficiencies noted performance of services to allow immediate corrective ac- tion. 1.09 BALANCING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 15030-2 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering A. Balance the loads on all feeders in such a way that dif- ference in the load between any two feeders is not more than 10%. B. Provide the Architect with the loads for each panel in- dicating phase and load for each panel. PART 2 PRODUCTS- Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION- Not Used END OF SECTION 15030-3 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering SECTION 15840 DUCTWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ductwork and plenums. B. Fasteners. C. Sealants. D. Duct Cleaning. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15860: Duct Accessories. B. Section 15870: Air Outlets. C. Section 15030: Testing. Adjusting and Balancing of Environ- mental Systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA duct manuals and ASHRAE handbooks. B. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A, Air Conditioning and Ven- tilating Systems NFPA 90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm .Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: outside clear dimensions. B. Low Pressure: Static pressure in duct less than 2 inch w.g. and velocities less than 2,000 fpm. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 15000. B. Submit shop drawings and samples of duct fittings, including particulars such as gage sizes, welds, and configurations prior to start of work. C. Confirm ductwork has been fabricated and installed in accor- dance with recommendations and SMACNA standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sealant: Water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials. B. Flexible Ducts: Corrugated aluminum or fabric supported by helically wound steel wire or flat steel strips. 15840-1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering 2.02 DUCT GAGES A. Fabricate duct in accordance with latest edition of SMACNA duct manual. Conform to required gages and reinforcing for rectangular and round ductwork. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. B. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. C. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 ft. maximum length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. END OF SECTION 15840-2 �' October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates SECTION 15870 AIR OUTLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. New diffusers, grilles, registers to replace existing items remove( during demolition, as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. B. New blanks, take -offs, ductwork as required for transition from existing ducts to new air outlets. C. Balance supply air at new outlets. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling. B. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and record air flow at existing supply outlets prior to demolition of ceilings and outlets. Test in accordance with applicable ADC equipment test codes and ASHRAE standards. B. Test and balance air flow at new replacement outlets as in preceding paragraph. 1.04 CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work performed under this Section shall be done in strict _ accordance with state and local codes or ordinances including current editions of all applicable codes and supplements thereto and any other authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit product data and shop drawings covering each item together with schedule of outlets. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Review requirements of outlets as to size, finish and type of mounting prior to submitting shop drawings and schedules of outlets. 15870-1 B. Check location of new outlets against location of existing outlets to be removed, existing ductwork, and new lighting layout. Report any conflicts to A/E for resolution prior to ordering of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Supply and install items as listed in schedule complete in all respects. B. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Grilles, Diffusers, Registers - See Schedule at the end of this Section. B. Ducts: Galvanized steel lock forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 ounces per square foot for each side. C. Flexible Ducts: Corrugated aluminum or fabric supported by helically wound steel wire or flat steel strips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Fabricate and install transitions to new air outlets (flex duct or metal duct - Contractor's option) in such a manner that resulting air flow is equal to or greater than original installation. Test verify in accordance with paragraph 1.03, above. C. Coordinate with other trades prior to installation to insure �.. compatibility of all ceiling, lighting, air supply items. 3.02 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE MARK MODEL NO. TYPE FINISH REMARKS AA Metalaire Lay -in diffuser white Use square to No. 7600 round transition where applicable 15870-2 Traffic Engineering SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. General Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16, in addition to Division 1 provisions. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 1. B. Section 15000: General Provisions Mechanical & Electrical. C. Section 15030: Balancing of Electrical System. 1.03 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15000. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work of specified in this Division under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15000. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work. to meet job conditions, including changes to Work specified un- der other Sections. Obtain permission of, Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ANSI/IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical code. C. NECA - Standard of Installation. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Conform to ANSI/IEEE C2. C. Conform to Uniform Building Code. D. Obtain electrical permits, plan review, and inspections from authority having jurisdiction. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit inspection and permit certificates under provisions of Section 15000. B. Include certificate of final inspection and acceptance from authority having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS- Not Used. 16010-1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering p-. PART 3 - EXECUTION- Not Used. END OF SECTION 16010-2 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering SECTION 16111 CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Conduit and couplings. B. Flexible conduit. C. Nonmetallic ducts. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16131: Pull and Junction Boxes. B. Section 16134: Outlet Boxes C. Section 16195: Electrical Identification 1.03 REFERENCES A. NEC - National Electric Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Conduit: Rigid threaded galvanized steel, Electrical metal- lic tubing. B. Couplings: threaded, liquidtight, compression gland. C. Flexible conduit: Steel Armour, (Flexible plastic jacketed type with liquidtight connectors at exterior location). 2.02 TYPE A. Utilize electrical metallic tubing. B. Use three -eights 3/8 inch flexible conduit only for fixture and control wiring. Provide sufficient length of flexible conduit to avoid transmission of vibration. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit concealed in all areas excluding mechanical rooms, connections to motors, and connections to surface cabinets. B. Install conduit free from dents and bruises. Plug ends to prevent entry of dirt or moisture. C. Clean out conduit before installation of conductor. D. Alter conduit routing to avoid structural obstructions, min- imizing crossovers. E. Seal conduit with fiberglas where conduits leave heated area and enter unheated area. F. Route all exposed conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 16111-1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. For electrical metallic tubing entering a box use compres- sion type box connector and locknut. B. For connection between rigid conduit and flexible conduit, and flexible conduit connections to boxes, use combination couplings equal to T & B "Bite-Tite". END OF SECTION 16111-2 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering SECTION 16114 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Surface Metal Raceway. B. Raceway couplings. C. Raceway cabling covers. D. Outlet Boxes 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16111: Conduit A. Section 16131: Pull and Junction Boxes. B. Section 16134: Outlet Boxes C. Section 16195: Electrical Identification 1.03 REFERENCES A. NEC - National Electric Code. 1.04 TYPE A. Provide two piece surface metal raceway system for telephone and or power systems PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Wiremold Company B. Substitutions: under provisions of Section 15000 2.02 POWER & COMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY: G-4000 A. Base: .050 cold rolled steel with 1/2" and 3/4" trade size knock -outs at 18." centers. Furnish base sections in 101 lengths. B. Fittings: internal and external tees, couulings, elbows for joining raceway sections, blank end fittings for closing raceway. transsition connections to join raceway to trade size conduit from 1/2" to 1.1/4" in size. C. Device Covers: provide access to full line of combination device covers with mounting brackets that will facilitate the installation of aftermarket single gang devices. 2.03 POWER RACEWAY: G-2000 A. Base: .040 cold rolled steel base with 0.025 cold rolled steel cover, with 1/2" and 3/4" trade size knock -outs at 918 centers. Furnish base sections in 10' lengths. 16114-1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering B. Fittings: internal and external tees, copulings, elbows for joining raceway sections, blank end fittings for closing raceway. transsition connections to join raceway to trade size conduit from 1/2" to 1.1/4" in size. C. Device Covers: provide access to full line of combination device covers with mounting brackets that will facilitate the installation of aftermarket single gang devices. 2.02 DEVICES A. Power: Wiremold G-3043GE Duplex grounding receptacle and cover. Wiremold 20GBA series outlets. B. Telephone: Wiremold G3046H-2 Tap off fitting with concentric knock -outs and twistout for telephone cables. provvide grom- mets for telephone knock -out. r� PART 3 EXECUTION A. For exposed runs, attach surface mounted conduit with con- cealed screws thru base unit of raceway. B. Coordinate installation of raceway with other trades. C. Feed raceway from flush outlet boxes as indicated, make ttransitions with appropriate fittings. D. Install devvices with device bracket. wire device and as- sembly on bracket, install cover •over device and assembly ... after completion. E. Cut sections of cover to fit between individual device plates. Snap sections in place on base in its entirety. F. Provide appropriate devices as reequired for application. END OF SECTION 16114-2 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Wires and cables. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16195: Electrical Identification 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEC - National Electric Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Building Wiring: 98 per cent conductivity copper, 6TOO volt insulation. B. Branch Circuit Wiring: Conductors smaller than no. 12 AWG gage not permitted. C. Provide permanent plastic name tag indicating load fed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Make conductor length for parallel feeders identical. B. Lace or clip groups of feeder conductors at distribution centers, pull boxes. C. Provide copper grounding conductors and straps. D. Install wire and cable in code conforming raceway. E. Use wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wire. F. Install wire in conduit runs after moisture is swabbed from conduits. G. Splice only in accessible junction or outlet boxes. H. Color code conductors to designate neutral conductor and phase. I. All 20 A circuits 100' and over use #10 TW. J. Use solid conductors for #10 and smaller. K. Use stranded conductors for #8 and larger. L. All conductors #8 and larger type THW. M. Use type THHN conductors for thru wiring of fluorescent lighting fixtures. 3.02 COLOR CODING 16120-1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates P.- Traffic Engineering A. Color code conductors to designate neutral conductors and phase. B. Use consistent color coding throughout job. C. If color of conductors is unavailable use Brady Plastic Sleeves or tape. 3.03 SPLICES A. Run feeders continuous throughout run use no splices. B. For joints in stranded conductors use solderless bolted pressure connectors. C. For solid conductors use solderless connectors (wire nuts) Skotch-Lok. D. Cover all joints or splices with rubber friction tape to make joint equal to conductor insulation. END OF SECTION 16120-2 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering SECTION 16131 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pullboxes. B. Junction boxes. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. N.E.C. - National Electrical Code NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pullboxes and Junction Boxes: Metal construction, confor- ming to National Electrical Code, with screw -on or hinged cover. B. Flush Mounted Pullboxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush -head cover retaining screws, prime coated. ` PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Locate pullboxes and junction boxes above removable ceilings or in electrical rooms, utility rooms, or storage areas. END OF SECTION 16131-1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates 0 Traffic Engineering SECTION 16134 OUTLET BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Outlet boxes. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16141: Devices. B. Section 16111: Conduit PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Raco, Inc. B. Steel City C. Bowers 2.02 MATERIALS A. Boxes: Hot dip galvanized, 1.25 oz. per sq.ft. or cadmium plated, conform to UL requirements. B. Interior Boxes: pressed sheet steel, blanked for conduit. Provide attached lugs for locating. C. Exterior Boxes: cast, deep type. D. For Ceiling: 4 in., octagonal boxes for receiving three or less 1/2 in. conduits. ..., E. For Flush Mounting in Walls: Boxes with matching plaster cover for single or two gang outlets. For larger boxes use solid type or special units. In masonry use deep boxes. F. Surface Mounted: 4 inch square. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount outlet boxes flush in areas other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and above removable ceilings. B. Adjust position of outlets in finished masonry walls to suit masonry course lines. C. Do not install boxes back-to-back in same wall. Coordinate cutting of masonry walls to achieve neat openings for boxes. Use rotary cutting equipment to cut masonry work for instal- lation of electrical fittings. D. Locate boxes in masonry walls so that only a corner need be cut from masonry units. E. Do not use sectional or handy boxes unless specifically re- quested. 16134-1 1 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering F. For boxes mounted in exterior walls make sure that there is insulation behind outlets boxes to prevent condensation in boxes. G. For outlets mounted above counters, benches, or splashbacks coordinate location and mounting heights with built-in units. Adjust outlet mounting height to agree with required location for equipment served. END OF SECTION 16134-2 2 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering SECTION 16141 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Floor mounted service fittings. E. Device plates and box covers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet. B. FS W-S-896 - Switch, Toggle. �. C. NEMA WD 1 - General -Purpose Wiring Devices. D. NEMA WD 2 - Semiconductor Dimmers for Incandescent Lamps. E. NEMA WD 5 - Specific -Purpose Wiring Devices. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15000 ,.. B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL SWITCHES. ® A. Hubbell Wiring Devices B. General Electric Wiring Devices C. Leviton Wiring Devices D. Substitutions: in accordance with provisions of Section 15000 2.02 WALL SWITCHES A. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits and Motor Loads Under 1/2 HP: NEMA WD; 1 AC general use snap switch with toggle handle, rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts AC. Handle: plas- tic. B. Pilot Light Type: Lighted handle.CPilot strap in adjacent gang.] .- C. Locator Type: Lighted handle. D. Switches Single Pole 1221 Hubbell Double Pole 1222 Hubbell Three Way 1223 Hubbell Four Way 1224 Hubbell Single Pole — Lock 1221-L Hubbell Three Way - Lock 1223-L Hubbell 16141 - 1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering Four Way - Lock 1224-L Hubbell Momentary Contact 1557 Hubbell Pilot Switch and Light 1221-IL Hubbell 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RECEPTACLES A. Hubbbell Wiring Devices B. General Electric Wiring Devices C. Leviton Wiring Devices D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15000 2.04 RECEPTACLES A. Convenience and Straight -blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 1. B. Locking -Blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 5. C. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1; Type 5-15 and 20A for dedicated outlets, plastic face. D. Specific -use Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on Drawings, plastic face. E. GFCI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with in- tegral ground fault current interrupter. F. Receptacles Duplex Receptacle 15A 125 5252 Hubbell Duplex Receptacle 20A 125 5362 Hubbell Simplex Receptacle 15A 125 5251 Hubbell Simplex Receptacle 20A 125 5361 Hubbell Ground Fault Receptacle 125 GF-5362 Hubbell Clock Outlet 15A 125 NO. 7707-SS Dryer Outlet 30A 250 2620-A Hubbell Range Outlet 50A 250 9367 Hubbell Computer Outlet 125 5352-5 Hubbell 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL PLATES A. Sierra B. Leviton C. Hubbell D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15000. 2.10 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, OFF position down. B. Install convenience receptacles 12 inches above floor, in- stall receptacles 18" above floor where required for hand- icapped accessibility. Install outlets minimum 4" above counters or splash. Install outlets grounding pole on bot- tom. 16141 - 2 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering C. Install specific -use receptacles at heights shown on Con- tract Drawings. D. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas, using jumbo size plates for out- lets installed in masonry wall. E. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface -mounted outlets. F. Install devices and wall plates flush and level. G. Provide GFCI outlet at all exterior weather proof outlets. END OF SECTION 16141 - 3 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Conduit supports. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16111: Conduit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Single Runs: Galvanized conduit straps or ring bolt type hangers with specialty spring clips. Equal to Kindorf no. 150. B. Multiple Runs: Conduit rack with 25 percent spare capacity. Super Strut, Kindorf. C. Vertical Runs: Channel support with conduit fittings. 2.02 ANCHOR METHODS A. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors. B. Solid Masonry: Lead expansion anchors or present inserts. C. Metal Surfaces: Machine screws, bolts, or welded studs. D. Concrete Surfaces: Self -drilling anchors or powder driven studs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Layout to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance, and to support equipment loads required. B. Do not use plumbers perforated straps. C. Locate hangers and trapezes to support horizontal loads without appreciable sagging use maximum spacing per NEC, space closer where conditions require. END OF SECTION 16141 - 4 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Nameplates and tape labels. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit color coding. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 15000. B. Include schedule for nameplates and tape labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, white letters on a black background. B. Tape Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on background. C. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape labels. B. Install nameplates and tape labels parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. 3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gut- ters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire num- ber as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams for control wiring. 3.03 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, and loads served. Letter Height: 1/8 ,. inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4 inch for distribution and control equipment identification. 16195 - 1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering B. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below. C. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 1/4 inch ; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch ; identify voltage rating and source. D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters In Panelboards, Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8 inch ; identify circuit and load served, including location. E. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch; identify load served. 3.04 CONDUIT COLOR CODING SCHEDULE A. Use colored tape to identifying conduit by system. B. Primary Distribution System: C. 208 Volt, Single and Three Phase System: D. Motor and Other Control Systems. END OF SECTION 16195 - 2 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates 0 Traffic Engineering SECTION 16501 LAMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and install items as listed in schedule at end of this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16510: Interior Building Lighting. B. Section 16502: Ballasts and Accessories. 1.03 SUBMITTALS .� A. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. General Electric. B. Philips. C. Sylvania. 2.03 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Energy Saving (ESL) Lamps equal to General Electric Watt Mizer. Wattage Color Average Rated Life Lumens 35 Cool White 2,850 20,000 hr. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in accordance with manufacturer's instruc- tions. END OF SECTION 16501-1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates Traffic Engineering SECTION 16502 BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and install required ballasts. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16510: Interior Building Lighting. B. Section 16501: Lamps. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BALLASTS. A. Provide ballasts with high power factors(HPF) 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Provide ballasts that meet standards of an electrical test- ing laboratory and the Certified Ballasts Manufacturers' As- sociation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Advance. B. Universal. C. General Electric. 2.03 ENERGY SAVING BALLAST (ESB) A. General Electric - Maximizer II fluorescent ballast. B. Advance - Mark III Energy Saving Ballast. C. Utilize two -lamp ballasts wherever possible. D. Equip ballasts with capacitors and pressure relief devices to prevent rupturing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide ballasts of compatible design to lamps specified. B. Mount high intensity discharge ballasts on rubber grommets to reduce noise transmission. END OF SECTION 16502-1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates SECTION 16510 INTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Supply and install luminaires, supports, accessories, and wiring as ^� required for replacement lighting and additional lighting as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. B. All luminaires shall be furnished and installed complete with ballasts and lamps as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling B. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings C. Section 16120 - Wires and Cables D. Section 16190 - Supports E. Section 16501 - Lamps F. Section 16502 - Ballasts and Accessories 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Confirm compatibility and interface of other existing and new materials with luminaires and ceiling system. Report discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer, and defer ordering until clarified. .. B. Supply any accessories required to other trades. C. Coordinate with other trades to avoid conflict between luninaires, supports, fittings, wiring, and mechanical equipment. 1.05 CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with state and local codes or ordinances, the current edition of the National Electrical Code and all current supplements thereto and any other authorities having jurisdiction over the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedules included at the end of this Section and on Drawings. B. Substitutions: Items of equal function and performance in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Prime coat and finish in high reflectance baked white enamel, two coats minimum on exposed and reflective surfaces, giving reflectance - of 85 per cent. B. Reflective plates may be 22 gage metal. C. Provide minimum 22 gage steel housing. D. Provide hinged frames with catches; removable for cleaning without - tools. Support lay -in lenses on four sides with flip ends on short dimension. E. Provide gasketing, stops and barriers to form light traps and prevent light leaks. F. Design luminaire to dissipate ballast and lamp heat. G. Use formed or ribbed backplates, endplates and reinforcing channels. H. Provide virgin acrylic diffusers, 0.125 inches thick minimum. I. Paint fixtures after fabrication. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUPPORTS A. Support fluorescent luminaires directly from building structure by rod hangers and inserts or metal angle headers supported from framing structure of ceiling suspension system. B. Support luminaires more than 2 ft. wide by four hangers per luminaire minimum independent of ceiling structure or tee bars. 3.02 CONDUIT AND WIRING A. Undamaged conduit and wiring for existing lighting circuits may be reused. Replace all damaged material with new items of equal size and-, quality. B. Furnish and install any new conduit and wiring required as a result of modified configuration and quantity of new replacement lighting. Serve new circuits from existing panels as required and in accordance with paragraph 1.05 of this section. C. Switching of new lighting shall be the same as switching of existing light fixtures. If' any conflicts arise as a result of new lighting configuration and/or quantity, consult Architect/Engineer for revised switching pattern prior to final wiring. t., 3.03 EXIT LIGHTS A. Remove existing exit lights in area(s) of work, replace lamps and re -install after installation of new ceiling. Clean and leave in proper working condition. 3.04 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES v A. Install fixtures in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Align fixtures and clean lenses prior to final acceptance. 3.05 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE Fixture 'A' - Equal to Lithonia 2PM2GH 440 RW A19 120 ES (Air handling troffer - through side slots and body) Fixture 'B' - Equal to Lithonia 2PM2GB 440 RW A19 120 ES <Static troffer) Fixture 'C' - Equal to Lithonia 2PM2GH 440 RW A19 120 ES EL °^ (Air handling troffer - emergency unit) Fixture 'D' - Equal to Lithonia 2PM2GB 440 RW A19 120 ES EL (Static troffer - emergency unit) Fixture 'E' - Equal to Lightolier "Circulume" No. 6716 with one 100 watt incandescent bulb. END OF SECTION SECTION 16741 TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Traffic Engineering. — A. Telephone raceway system. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16111: conduit. B. Section 16131: Pull and Junction Boxes. C. Section 16134: outlet Boxes. D. Section 16195: Electrical Identification 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Conduit and outlets to form empty raceway system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Conduit: Refer to Section 16111. B. Outlet Boxes: Refer to Section 16134. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide pullboxes in telephone conduit runs spaced not greater than 100 ft. apart, and on backboard side of runs with more than two right angle bends. B. Place TELEPHONE label on pull and junction boxes. C. Provide pullwire in each telephone conduit run. D. Provide a complete conduit system /conduit to above ceiling. END OF SECTION 16741-1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates r- SECTION 16742 COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Traffic Engineering A. Computer Raceway System. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16111: Conduit. B. Section 16131: Pull and Junction Boxes. C. Section 16134: Outlet Boxes. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Conduit, and outlets to form empty raceway system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Conduit: Refer to Section 16111. B. Outlet Boxes: Refer to Section 16134. C. Floor Boxes: Refer to Section 16132. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Place computer label on pull and junction boxes. B. Provide pullwire in each computer conduit run. END OF SECTION 16741-1 October 2, 1990 * Allied Associates (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT TEMPORARY HOLDING FACILITY DESK SERGEANT RENOVATION POLICE PROPERTY ROOM RENOVATION *************************************************************************** ARCHITECTS McLartySmithArchitectsAIA 1919 Broadway Lubbock, Texas 79401 (806) 763-5046 *************************************************************************** TABLE OF CONTENTS CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT TEMPORARY HOLDING FACILITY DESK SERGEANT RENOVATION POLICE PROPERTY ROOM RENOVATION Table of Contents O1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 - Summary of Work 01030 - Alternates 01031 - Allowance 01039 - Coordination and Meetings 01045 - Cutting and Patching 01120 - Alteration Project Procedures 01300 - Submittals 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01600 - Material and Equipment 01700 - Contract Closeout 02 SITEWORK 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling 02831 - Chain Link Fences and Gates 03 CONCRETE 03100 - Concrete Formwork 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete 04 MASONRY 04100 - Mortar 04270 - Glass Unit Masonry 04300 - Unit Masonry System 05 METALS 05120 - Structural Steel 05500 - Metal Fabrications 06 WOOD AND PLASTIC 06200 - Finish Carpentry 06410 - Custom Casework 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07900 - Joint Sealers TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08111 - Standard Steel Doors 08112 - Standard Steel Frames 08211 - Flush Wood Doors 08712 - Door Hardware 08800 - Glazing 09 FINISHES 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster 09260 - Gypsum Board System r 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09650 - Resilient Flooring 09688 - Carpet -Glue Down 09900 - Painting 10 SPECIALITIES 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories 11 EQUIPMENT 11180 - General Conditions - Holding Equipment 11190 - Holding Equipment 12 FURNISHINGS - Not Applicable 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - Not Applicable -- 14 CONVEYING SYSTEM - Not Applicable 15 MECHANICAL 15010 - Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15400 - Plumbing 15800 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 16 ELECTRICAL 16010 - Electrical 16020 - Communications System END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project/Work Identification. B. Scope. C. Contractor use of site and premises. D. Contractor use of Existing Building. E. Work Sequence. F. Owner occupancy. G. Award of Construction Contract. H. Selection of Alternates. 1.02 PROJECT/WORK IDENTIFICATION A. The project name is as indicated on the Contract Documents prepared by McLartySmithArchitectsAIA, 1919 Broadway, Lubbock, Texas 79401 with the date as indicated on the documents. The Contract Documents indicate the extent of the Work of the Construction Contract and related requirements and conditions that impact the Project B. Items, if any, noted 'NIC' (Not in Contract), will be furnished and installed by Owner or others at a time that is beneficial to the scheduling of the Work. Verify, in writing with the Owner and/or Architect, any requirements of "NIC" items prior to commencement of any work. C. Contractor shall verify Owner requirements for removal and Owner possession of any item or items of the Work, and shall be confirmed in writing prior to start of work: D. Contractor shall verify items, if any, to be Furnished by Owner For Final Connection by Contractor. Verification shall be in writing and shall be signed by the Owner prior to start of the work. 1.03 SCOPE A. Provide all labor, tools, equipment, materials and all other items required and necessary to accomplish the Work specified herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Work of the Contract can be summarized by references to the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01010 - 1 r. Specification Sections, Drawings, Addenda and Modifications to the Contract Documents issued subsequent to the initial printing of this Project Manual and including but not necessarily limited to printed material referenced by any of these. It is recognized that Work of the Contract is also unavoidably affected or influenced by governing regulations, natural phenomenon including weather conditions and other forces outside the Contract Documents. C. All surfaces damaged during demolition and/or construction and installation of new work/systems under Base Bid and/or Alternate(s) shall be repaired and patched to match the existing materials and finishes. All such work shall be included in the Construction Contract, under the Base Bid or the Alternate in which it occurs. D. The General/Prime Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of all cutting, patching and demolition of other items and systems involved in all Trades of the Project. 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Limit use of site and/or premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy when required by the Owner. 2. Work by Others, if required and Work by Owner, if required. 3. Use of site and/or premises by public. B. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. C. Time Restrictions for Performing the Work: Contractor shall verify, in writing any time restrictions required by the Owner prior to bidding. D. Utility Outages and Shutdown: When required by Project Scope, the Contractor shall notify Owner, in writing, of any utility outage or shutdown seven days prior to any utility outage or shutdown. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF EXISTING BUILDING A. When Project scope includes work in an existing building, maintain the existing building in a safe and weathertight condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants, when occupied, during the construction period. B. Keep public areas such as hallways, stairs, lobbies, and toilet rooms, etc., free from accumulation of waste materials, rubbish or construction debris. C. Smoking or open fires will not be permitted within the building enclosure or on the premises. SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01010 - 2 1.06 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct Work in stages to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements during the construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with Architect/Engineer. 1.07 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner does intend to occupy portions of the Project during the construction period. This will apply to the Desk Sergeant's area and a portion of the Property Room. The holding area will be vacated during the construction. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate these requirements. 1.08 AWARD OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT A. The Owner will award a Construction Contract to the Firm that has the lowest bid when Owner selected alternate(s), if applicable, is/are added to the Base Bid. B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any bid or bids whether it is low or not. 1.09 SELECTION OF ALTERNATE(S) A. When the scope of the work includes Alternates, the Owner reserves the right to select or reject any or all Alternate(s) listed and described herein and/or shown on the Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01010 - 3 SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES n PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submission procedures. B. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document AIA A101 - Agreement Form: Incorporating monetary value of accepted Alternates. B. Section 00200 -Instructions To Bidders; Section 00300 - Proposal for Construction. C. Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS A. Submit Alternates with full description of the proposed Alternate and the affect on adjacent or related components. B. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Owner -Contractor Agreement. C. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate. 1.04 SELECTION AND AWARD OF ALTERNATIVES A. Indicate variation of Bid Price for Alternates described below and -- list in Bid Form Document or any supplement to it, which requests a 'difference' in Bid Price by adding to or deducting from the base bid price. B. Bid will be awarded on "lowest" Base Bid PLUS any Owner selected Alternate(s) Price. C. Owner reserves the right to select or reject any or all Alternate(s) listed herein or shown on the Drawings. 1.05 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. PROPERTY ROOM - Alternate #1: Install new unit heaters. B. PROPERTY ROOM - Alternate #2: Door Buzzer and Intercom System. C. PROPERTY ROOM - Alternate #3: Fire Alarm System ALTERNATES SECTION 01030 - 1 D. PROPERTY ROOM - Alternate #4: Video Camera System E. PROPERTY ROOM - Alternate #5: Intrusion Alarm System F. HOLDING RENOVATION - Alternate #1: Glazing PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ALTERNATES SECTION 01030 - 2 ME SECTION 01031 ALLOWANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Authorization of Use of Allowance. B. Allowance. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document AIA A101 - Agreement Form. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS A. The Allowance will be used at the Owner's discretion. Only the Owner has the authority to permit the use of funds from this allowance. 1.04 ALLOWANCE SCHEDULE A. A Contract Allowance of 5% of the Total Bid shall be included in the Base Bid Lump Sum Price PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION SECTION 01031 ALLOWANCE SECTION 01039 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Preconstruction conference. C. Progress meetings. D. Preinstallation conferences. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions, when applicable, for accommodating items installed later. B. verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated, when applicable, for Owners partial occupancy. F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE COORDINATION AND MEETINGS SECTION 01039 - 1 A. Architect/Engineer will schedule a conference after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: Owner, or Owner's Representative, ... Architect/Engineer and Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule ., of Values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the Architect/Engineer. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. 1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals as requested by Owner. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days to Architect/Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, or Owner's Representative, Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. B. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. 1.06 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When required in individual specification Section, convene a preinstallation conference at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, COORDINATION AND MEETINGS SECTION 01039 - 2 work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect/Engineer four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days after conference to participants, with two copies to Architect/Engineer. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION COORDINATION AND MEETINGS SECTION 01039 - 3 SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. B. Section 01120 - Alteration Project Procedures: Cutting and patching for alterations work. C. Section 01300 - Submittals. D. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section. 2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those Sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. B. Include in request: 1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation. B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution under provisions of Section 01600. CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01045 - 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, when applicable to complete work. B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work. C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. D. Remove and replace defective or non -conforming work. E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. 3.04 PERFORMANCE A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. B. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight -exposed surfaces. C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01045 - 2 F. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material to full -- thickness of the penetrated element. G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01045 - 3 SECTION 01120 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products and installation for patching and extending Work. B. Transition and adjustments. C. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Work sequence; Owner occupancy; Maintenance of utility services. B. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching: Cutting and patching. C. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary enclosures; Protection of installed work; Cleaning during construction. D. Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling: Removal and storage of products to be reinstalled in this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK A. New Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing Products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspection and testing Products where necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new Work. B. Beginning of restoration Work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES SECTION 01120 - 1 0 B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work. C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. D. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and finishes. E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and to accommodate Owner occupancy. B. Project areas, Rooms and spaces and Finishes: Complete in all respects including operational mechanical and electrical work. C. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to °— provide a means of restoring Products and finishes to original condition. D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. E. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures, restore existing plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, electrical, and life safety systems to full operational condition. F. Install Products as specified in individual Sections. 3.04 TRANSITIONS A. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect/Engineer. 3.05 ADJUSTMENTS A. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. B. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES SECTION 01120 - 2 recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect/Engineer review. C. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required. D. Fit work at penetrations of surfaces as specified in Section 01045. 3.06 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. 3.07' FINISHES A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections. B. Finish patches to product uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.08 CLEANING A. In addition to cleaning specified in Section 01500, clean Owner occupied areas of work. END OF SECTION ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES SECTION 01120 - 3 ^^ SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Proposed products list. D. Shop drawings. �. E. Product data. F. Samples. G. Manufacturers' instructions. H. Manufacturers' certificates. I. Construction photographs. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Schedule of Values. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranty and manufacturer's certificates and other closeout submittals. 1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810. B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with an alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate. ,.., D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialled certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect/Engineer at business address. Coordinate submission of .— related items. Submit all color and finish materials submittals at the same time. Selections of any and all color and finish materials will not be made until all submittals have been provided to the SUBMITTALS SECTION 01300 - 1 Architect. F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. G. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps. H. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial progress schedule, that establishes Owner required "deadlines", in duplicate within 10 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement for Architect/Engineer review. B. Revise and resubmit as required. C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. D. Submit a computer generated or horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week. E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and under Allowances. 1.05 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. SUBMITTALS SECTION 01300 - 2 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, .� plus two copies which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. B. After review, reproduce and distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.07 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer. B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. C. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.08 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect/Engineer's selection. C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. D. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. .� E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification Sections. 1.09 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. SUBMITTALS SECTION 01300 - 3 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to Architect/Engineer for review, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS SECTION 01300 - 4 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, protection of the work, and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Parking, and progress cleaning. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. 1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. For existing construction, connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. B. Provide temporary electric feeder from existing building or electrical service at location as directed. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. C. For existing construction, exercise measures to conserve energy. D. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required. Provide flexible power cords as required. E. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location. F. Permanent convenience receptacles may not be utilized during construction unless authorized in writing by Owner. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools as required. 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 01500 -1 C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes. D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.05 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Provide and pay for ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.06 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization unless otherwise authorized in writing by Owner. 1.07 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Existing water supply may be utilized for construction purposes. 1.08 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Existing facilities may be used. 1.09 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights -of -way and for public access to existing building. C. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. D. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.10 WATER CONTROL A. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 01500 -2 1.11 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather -tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self -closing hardware and locks. 1.12 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES (when applicable) A. Provide temporary partitions as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Framing and plywood sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces; maximum Flame Spread Rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner occupied areas. 1.13 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.14 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with owner's security program. This project is located in high security areas where security must be tight at all times. I CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 01500 -3 1.15 PARKING A. Arrange for permits from the city for barricades for curbside construction parking for construction personnel. Parking tickets will be the Contractor's responsibility. B. City employee parking lots may not be used by the Contractor or his personnel. 1.16 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off -site. 1.17 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, . facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 01500 -4 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Transportation and handling. C. Storage and protection. D. Product options. E. Substitutions. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring. 1.03 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 01600 - 1 supports, above ground. C. Provide -off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or protection. D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Provide mixing with foreign matter. F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. 1.06 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 1.O7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Architect/Engineer will consider requests for Substitutions only within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed.] B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 01600 - 2 IN revision to the Contract Documents. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. 3. The Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 01600 - 3 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning. 1.03 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.04 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D. Clean permanant type filters and replace disposable type filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 01700 - 1 6-- F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction ,., facilities from the site. 1.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. F. Delete Architect/Engineer title block and seal from all documents. G. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 01700 2 B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on 24 pound white paper. E. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. F. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. G. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. 2. Air and water balance reports. 3. Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. H. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. I. Submit final volumes revised, within ten days after final inspection. 1.08 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 01700 - 3 r-Q " provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.09 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used -- PART 3 EXECUTION Not used r� END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 01700 - 4 SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. B. Removal of designated construction. C. Identification of utilities. D. Refer to items as indicated on plans. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Owner's continued occupancy. B. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings. C. Section 01120 - Alteration Project Procedures: Re -installation of removed and stored equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition and removal sequence and location of salvageable items; location and construction of temporary work. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, safety of structure and dust control. B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. D. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. E. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 day prior written notice to the Owner. F. Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous or MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 02072 - 1 contaminated materials. 1.06 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 01010 and in coordination with the Owner. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work to coincide with new construction.. .m C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule. D. Perform work between the hours of 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers at locations as required for security. B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, �.- odors and noise to permit continued Owner occupancy, as specified in Section 01010. D. Protect existing materials and finishes which are not to be demolished. E. Prevent movement of structure; provide required bracing and shoring. F. Mark location of utilities. 3.02 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger. Notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed. C. Maintain protected egress and access to the Work. ,., MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 02072 - 2 3.03 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect and cap designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. C. Except where noted otherwise, remove demolished materials from site. Do not burn or bury materials on site. D. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave areas in clean condition. E. Remove temporary Work. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Remove, store and protect the following materials and equipment for reinstallation: 1. East garage door at the Police Property Room. B. Remove and turn over to the owner the following items for his use: 1. Window Air Conditioner at the Police Property Room. END OF SECTION MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 02072 - 3 SECTION 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fence framework, fabric, and accessories. B. Excavation for post bases; concrete foundation for posts and center drop for gates. C. Manual gates and related hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. B. ANSI/ASTM F567 - Installation of Chain -Link Fence. C. ASTM A116 - Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric. D. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. E. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. F. ASTM C94 - Ready -mixed Concrete. G. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) - Product Manual. H. FS RR-F-191 - Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (and Gates, Chain Link Fence Fabric, and Accessories). 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fence Height: as indicated on Drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components. C. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware. ,-e CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES SECTION 02831 - 1 D. Samples: Submit two samples of fence fabric, 12 inch x 12 inch in size illustrating construction and finish. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Framing Steel: ASTM A120; Schedule 40 steel pipe, standard weight, welded joints permitted. B. Fabric Wire Steel: ASTM A392 zinc coated wire fabric. C. Concrete: Type specified in Section 03300. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Gate Posts: 3.5 inch diameter. B. Top and Brace Rail: 1.66 inch diameter, plain end, sleeve coupled. C. Gate Frame: 1.66 inch diameter for welded fabrication. D. Fabric: 1.75 inch diamond mesh interwoven wire, 6 gage, 5 mm thick, top selvage twisted tight, bottom selvage knuckle end closed. E. Tie Wire: Aluminum alloy steel wire. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel. B. Gate Hardware: Fork latch with gravity drop, two 180 degree gate hinges per leaf and hardware for padlock. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES SECTION 02831 - 2 «� 2.04 FINISHES A. Components and Fabric: Galvanized to ANSI/ASTM A123; 1.8 oz/sq ft .� coating. B. Hardware: Galvanized to ASTM A153, 1.8 oz/sq ft coating. C. Accessories: Same finish as framing. --, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ANSI/ASTM F567. .- B. Set gate posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing level with existing finish floor grade. C. Attach fabric to top rail, header rail and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips. D. Do not swing gate from building wall; provide gate posts as shown on -- plans. E. Install gate with fabric to match fence. Install three hinges per leaf, latch, and catches. 3.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES �-^ A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch. END OF SECTION „. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES SECTION 02831 - 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast -in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Form accessories. C. Form stripping. 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Supply of concrete accessories for placement by this Section. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice For Concrete Formwork. B. PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of formwork. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work which require CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100 - 1 attachment of components to formwork. C. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Plywood: Douglas Fir species; solid face one side, select sheathing, grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean, true edges. B. Lumber: Douglas Fir species; Construction grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. 2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, adjustable length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, free of defects that could leave holes larger than one inch in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or'color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. C. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with Drawings. 3.02 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. r- CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100 - 2 3.03 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. 3.04 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate work of other Sections in and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. 3.05 FORM CLEANING A. Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean -out ports. D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts or water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heat enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.06 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. B. Construct and align formwork for elevator hoistway in accordance with ANSI/ASME A17.1. C. Camber slabs and beams 1/4 inch per 10 feet and in accordance with ACI 301. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100 - 3 B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than three times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. 3.08 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. END OF SECTION ., CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100 - 4 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES - A. Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast-inplace concrete. _ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete. C. ACI SP-66 - American Concrete Institute - Detailing Manual. D. ANSI/ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ANSI/ASTM A184 - Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ANSI/ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete _ Reinforcement. G. ANSI/ASTM A496 - Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. H. ANSI/ASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. - I. ANSI/AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code for Reinforcing Steel. J. ANSI/AWS D12.1 - Reinforcing Steel Welding Code. K. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. L. ASTM A616 - Rail Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. M. ASTM A617 - Axle Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. N. ASTM A704 - Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03200 - 1 O. ASTM A706 - Low -Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. -- P. ASTM A767 - Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. Q. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Practice. R. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice For Placing Reinforcing Bars. A- S. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice For Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI 63, 65 and Manual of Practice, ... ACI 301, ACI SP-66, ACI 318, and ANSI/ASTM A184. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. D. Provide Architect/Engineer with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of reinforcement. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Design reinforcement under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed at the place where the Project is located. ^^ 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03200 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A616, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed rail steel bars, plain, Class I finish. B. Stirrup Steel: ANSI/ASTM A82, plain, Class I finish. C. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A497 Welded Deformed Type; in coiled rolls; plain, Class I finish. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice, ACI SP-66, ACI 318, and ANSI/ASTM A184. B. Weld reinforcement in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4 and ANSI/AWS D12.1. C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress. Review location of splices with Architect/Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. - B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL END OF SECTION CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03200 - 3 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floors and slabs on grade. B. Column Footings and fence post footings. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Placement of joint device in formwork. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Formwork and accessories. B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. C. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. D. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. E. ACI 3 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. F. ANSI/ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. G. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. H. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. I. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. J. ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. K. ASTM C330 - Light Weight Aggregates For Structural Concrete. L. ASTM C494 - Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete. M. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - 1 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories, admixtures and curing. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. C. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. D. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. E. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33 and C330. C. Water: Drinkable. 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. B. Chemical: ASTM C494, Type A - Water Reducing. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618; Type C or Type F. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion. B. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil thick clear polyethylene film. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - 2 C. Non -Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non- metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 3,000 psi in 28 days. D. Sealant and Primer: type, as specified in Section 07900. 2.04 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 304. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1. C. Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Compressive Strength (7 days): 2,400 psi; (28 days): 3,000 psi. a. Slabs and Footings. 2. Compressive Strength (7 days): 3,400 psi; (28 days): 4,000 psi. a. Exterior Walks and Porches. 3. Slump: l to 3 inches. 4. Minimum Water/Cement Ratio: 0.58 for slabs and footings. 5. Minimum Water/Cement Ratio: 0.35 for exterior walks and porches. D. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. _ E. Use calcium chloride only when approved in writing by Architect/Engineer. F. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved in writing by Architect/Engineer. G. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. 1. Slab on grade: 1 1/2 inches maximum from finish floor. 2. Footings: 3 inches maximum from top, bottom, and sides. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. D. Verify that slab on grade reinforcement is resting on plastic chairs of required height prior to placement of concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - 3 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non -shrink grout. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304, ACI 301, and ACI 318. B. Plane concrete slab over a minimum 2 inch thick sand cushion. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers, joint devices and plastic chairs are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. E. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. F. Install joint fillers, primer and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler. H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to flush with top of finished slab surface. I. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. J. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 3.04 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. B. Steel trowel surfaces. 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Cure concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - 4 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and under provisions of Section 01400. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less cu yds for each class of concrete placed. F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. 3.07 PATCHING A. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections as directed and in accordance with ACI 301. 3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect/Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area. END OF SECTION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - 5 SECTION 04100 MORTAR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES - A. Mortar and grout for masonry. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 04270 - Glass Unit Masonry. B. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System: Installation of mortar. C. Section 08111 - Standard Steel.Doors and Frames: Grouting steel door frames. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes. B. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement. _ C. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. D. ASTM C144 —Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. E. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement, F. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. G. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. H. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete. I. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. ^ J. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. K. ASTM C595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement. L. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. M. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. MORTAR SECTION 04100 - 1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include design mix, indicate Proportion or Property method used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. C. Samples: Submit under provisions of Section 01300. D. Samples: Submit two ribbons of mortar color, illustrating color and color range. E. Submit test reports under provisions of Section 01400. F. Submit test reports on mortar indicating conformance to ASTM C270. G. Submit test reports on grout indicating conformance to ASTM C476. H. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that products meet or exceed specified requirements. I. Submit premix mortar manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against ,.. dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperatures to minimum 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.07 MIX TESTS A. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Section 01400. B. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780. C. Test mortar mix for compressive strength and slump. D. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals. B. Gifford -Hill. C. Southern Grouts & Mortars. MORTAR SECTION 04100 - 2 D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type M. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. E. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non -hydraulic type. F. Premix Mortar: ASTM C387, using gray cement, High -Early strength. G. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. H. Grout Fine Aggregate: Bank sand. I. Water: Clean and potable. 2.03 MORTAR COLOR A. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; color as selected by Architect. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Plasticizer: Water reducing type which reduces porosity and absorption to increase bond strength. B. Water Repellent: Liquid type. 2.05 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Non -load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property Method. 2.06 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270. B. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. C. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. D. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper only within two hours of mixing. E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F (26 degrees C), or two -and -one-half hours at temperatures MORTAR SECTION 04100 - 3 P.- under 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). 2.07 GROUT MIXES A. Steel Frames: 3000 psi strength at 28 days; 5-6 inch slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout.] 2.08 GROUT MIXING A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix. C. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of the specific masonry Sections. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. D. Remove grout spaces of excess mortar. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Exterior Glass Block Wall at Police Property Room and door CMU infills at Police Station: Type S mortar with Type N pointing mortar. B. New Steel Door Frames to be grouted in the Police Station: 3000 PSI grout as specified in Section 2.07 above. END OF SECTION MORTAR SECTION 04100 - 4 SECTION 04270 GLASS UNIT MASONRY I23114M Ue*WW1it§ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass masonry units. B. Mortar bedding and pointing mortar. C. Perimeter chase. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04100 - Mortar: Mortar and grout for glass unit masonry. B. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter caulking. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings of Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strips. B. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. C. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit product data for glass units. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit two glass units illustrating size variations, color, design, and face pattern. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. GLASS UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04270 - 1 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of glass units, reinforcement, and mortar under provisions of Section 01400. B. Provide review and testing of mock-up under provisions of Section 01400. C. Construct a mock-up panel of 2 x 4 feet size, containing glass units with head, jamb, and sill conditions. D. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Accept glass units on site on pallets. Inspect for damage. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Submit maintenance materials under provisions of Section 01700. B. Furnish ten of each type and size of glass unit to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Pittsburg Corning. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 GLASS UNITS A. Hollow Glass Units: Permanently seal hollow unit by heat fusing joint with joint key to assist mortar bond. 1. Nominal Size: 8 x 8 x 4 inch. 2. Color: clear glass. 3. Pattern and Design: Essex AA by Pittsburg Corning. GLASS. UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04270 - 2 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Panel Reinforcing: Two 9 gage rods spaced 2 inches apart with 14 gage cross rods welded 8 inches oc, galvanized after fabrication to 1.25 oz/sq ft in accordance with ASTM A123. B. Expansion Strips: 7/16 x 4 inches nominal size, dense glass fiber matting. C. Panel Anchors: 20 gage x 1- 3/4 inch wide steel strips, punched with three rows of elongated holes, pattern staggered, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to 1.25 oz/sq ft in accordance with ASTM A123. D. Perimeter Chase: Extruded aluminum channel profile, 4-3/4 x 1-1/4 x 1/8 inch size, one piece per length installed, natural finish. E. Asphalt Emulsion: Water based asphalt emulsion. F. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate and conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean glass units of foreign substances. B. Establish and protect lines, levels, and coursing. C. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage and disfiguration. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Erect glass units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Locate and secure perimeter metal chase. C. Coat sill under units with asphalt emulsion as a bond breaker, and allow to dry. D. Set panel anchors in mortar bed directly over coating. E. Provide full mortar joints. Furrowing not permitted. Remove excess mortar. F. Maintain uniform joint width of 3/8 inch. GLASS UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04270 - 3 G. Place panel reinforcing at every second horizontal joint in full mortar bed and at first course above and below openings within the glass unit panel. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm). Discontinue reinforcement at expansion joints. H. Isolate panel from adjacent construction on sides and top with expansion strips. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar. I. Shore assembly until setting bed will maintain panel in position �^ without movement. J. To accommodate pointing mortar, rake out joints 5/8 to 3/4 inch. K. Fill joints with pointing mortar. Pack into voids. Neatly tool surface to a concave profile. L. Remove excess mortar. M. Vacuum clean mortar joints. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch and minus 0 inches. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. C. Maximum Variation of Panel from Plane: 1/8 inch. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean Work under provisions of 01700. ^. B. Do not scratch or deface units. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners. Provide protection without damaging completed work. END OF SECTION GLASS UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04270 - 4 SECTION 04300 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Regular concrete masonry units. B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing Laboratory Services. B. Section 04100 - Mortar: Mortar and grout. C. Section 04270 - Glass Unit Masonry. D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C129 - Non -Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. B. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. C. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit product data for regular masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit manufacturer's.certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04300 - 1 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code requirements for fire rated masonry construction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Featherlite Corporation. B. Burns & Russel Company. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Masonry Units: Nominal modular size: 1. Regular concrete masonry units: 8 x 8 x 16 inches. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Cleaning Solutions: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for ,� UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04300 - 2 roughing into masonry work. D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form concave mortar joints. 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. C. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses. D. Interlock intersections and external corners. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. G. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more. C. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch in 30 feet. D. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04300 - 3 r- 3.06 CUTTING AND FITTING ,... A. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. ._ 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. �- E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.08 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK ~a A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. END OF SECTION UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04300 - 4 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members, support members, and pipe columns. B. Baseplates. C. Grouting under baseplates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Non -framing fabrications affecting structural steel work. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Finish painting. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. B. ASTM A53 - Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. C. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. D. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. E. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. F. AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. G. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members,and attachments. 2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Submit under provisions of Section 01400 certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Mill Test Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 01400 Manufacturer's Certificates, indicating structural strength, STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05120 - 1 destructive and non-destructive test analysis. E. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01400 ^°R Manufacturer's Certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualifications within the previous 12 months. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC\-\Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. Perform Work in accordance with AISC - Specification for ® Architectural Exposed Structural Steel. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Design connections not detailed on the Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36. B. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. F. Grout: Non -shrink type, pre -mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. G. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide. STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05120 - 2 2.02 FABRICATION A. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. welds smooth. 2.03 FINISH Grind exposed A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-2. B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be field welded. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Testing and analysis of components will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.02 ERECTION A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. B. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings. C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer. D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. E. Grout under baseplates in accordance with Section 04100. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch . 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05120 - 3 0 r 0 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, prime painted. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural steel beams, pipe columns, and baseplates. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. B. ASTM A53 - Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. C. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. D. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. E. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. F. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. B. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01300, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 - 1 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. B. Plates: ASTM A283. D. Pipe: ASTM A531 Grade B Schedule 40. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FINISHES A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 2. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint items with one coat. METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. PIC, 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS Dl.l. E. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled. B. I Beam: W14 x 22, prime paint finish. C. Pipe Columns: 3" STD. Pipe Column, prime paint finish. ^F D. Top Plates: 1/2" x 5" x 9" w/ (4) 3/4" dia. A-325 Bolts. E. Bottom Plates: 1/2" x 8" x 8" w/ (4) - 3/4" x 7" exp. bolts, field anchored. - METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 - 3 F. Two (2) ship's ladders as manufactured by Precision Stair Corporation; 75 degree fixed angle. It shall be detailed and submitted for approval prior to fabrication showing full dimensions, wall and floor attachments. Material and construction must comply with all safety orders pertinent to the installation. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 - 4 SECTION 06200 CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plywood for furrdowns in Desk Sergeant Area and plywood for floor deck in Police Property Room. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinetwork. B. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass and glazing of glazed partition screens. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/HPHA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. .. B. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. C. AWI - Quality Standards. D. FS MM-L-736 - Lumber; Hardwood. E. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. F. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. G. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Hardwood. H. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. .-= I. UL - Underwriters Laboratories. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. B. Conform to UL requirements to achieve fire resistance assembly �-, rating indicated. 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide samples under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide field sample panel, 12 inch long by 12 inch wide, illustrating full panel sheet, edge trim, joint trim, applied CARPENTRY SECCTION 06200 - 1 B. Provide field sample panel, 12 inch long by 12 inch wide, illustrating full panel sheet, edge trim, joint trim, applied finish. C. Locate where directed. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit shop drawings indicating materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, finishes, and accessories to an appropriate scale. C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit product data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. E. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. F. Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain and specified finish. - G. Submit two samples 12 inch long of wood trim. H. Submit fabricator's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. I. Submit instructions for use of adhesives, attachment hardware, and - finish hardware. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Store materials in ventilated, interior locations under constant minimum temperatures of 60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; Standard Sheathing Grade, Group 1, Appearance Quality; Pine species, with face veneer of rotary cut grain. B. Joist Framing: Stress Group 1.2E, Douglas Fir species, structural grade, 2 inch x 6 inch, 19 percent maximum moisture content. CARPENTRY SECCTION 06200 - 2 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Size and type to suit application, plain finish. B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Blind Fasteners, Lags, and Screws: Size and ,- type to suit application; plain finish. C. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking, and Curbing: Softwood lumber of any species. 2.03 WOOD TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Fire Retardant ('FR-S' Type): Chemically treated, and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame/fuel/smoke rating required by code. 2.04 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Brush apply wood materials requiring UL fire rating to concealed . wood blocking. B. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated s-- material. C. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting. D. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 19 percent moisture content. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to AWI Custom standards. B. Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during site erection. 2.06 SHOP FINISHING A. Shop finish work in accordance with AWI 'Factory Finishing' Section 1500. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this Section are placed and ready to receive this work.. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. CARPENTRY SECCTION 06200 - 3 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom quality standard. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position. D. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficeint temporary bracing to maintian structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. E. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up. F. Construct load bearing framing members full length without splices. G. Bridge joists in excess of 8 feet span at midaspan. Fit solid blocking at ends of members. H. Install plywood to simple span. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch . C. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. D. Surface Flatness of Floor: Framing members 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum and 1/2 inch maximum in 30 feet. END OF SECTION CARPENTRY SECCTION 06200 - 4 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Special fabricated cabinet units. ~^ B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Preparation for site finishing. E. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Hardware: Supply of cabinet hardware for placement by this section. See Plans for Schedule. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09900 - Painting: Finishing cabinet exterior and interior. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI/BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. B. AWI - Quality Standards. C. FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood. D. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. E. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. F. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location, and schedule of finishes. C. Samples: Submit two, 3 x 3 inch size samples, illustrating cabinet finish and grain. CUSTOM CASEWORK SECTION 06410 - 1 D. Samples: Submit one set standard manufacturers' samples, illustrating counter top finish. E. Samples: Submit one sample of drawer pulls and hinges, illustrating - hardware finish. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI Premium quality; perform drawer and door front construction in accordance with AWI Custom quality. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.08 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of full size base cabinet and upper cabinet under provisions of Section 01400. B. Provide units with specified countertop; with hardware installed. C. Units will be examined to ascertain quality and conformity to AWI quality level standards and specification requirements. D. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with electrical rough -in. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI Custom; average moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: CUSTOM CASEWORK I SECTION 06410 - 2 ITEM SPECIES CUT Cabinet Frame (concealed) Poplar Rotary Concealed Stiles and Rails Poplar Rotary Semi -Exposed Construction Poplar Rotary B. Hardwood Lumber: FS MM-L-736; graded in accordance with AWI Custom and Premium; average moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: ITEM SPECIES CUT ^� Cabinet Frame (exposed) Stain Grade Birch Rotary Exposed Stiles and Rails Stain Grade Birch Rotary Exposed/Show End Stain Grade Birch Rotary 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer; species and cut as follows: ITEM Drawer Construction Gables and Backs Enclosed Shelving FACE SPECIES CUT W. Pine Rotary W. Pine Rotary W. Pine Rotary B. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts as follows: ITEM FACE SPECIES CUT Door and Drawer Fronts Stain Grade Birch Rotary Open, Exposed Shelving Stain Grade Birch Rotary C. Wood Particleboard: PS 1; AWI standard, composed of wood chips, medium density, made with high waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces, located as follows: ITEM Countertops Only. See Details on Drawings. r-. D. Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, standard grade, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one sides, located as follows: r-. ITEM Drawer Bottoms Gables and Backs 2.03 MANUFACTURERS - PLASTIC LAMINATE A. Wilsonart: Product - Plastic Laminate. B. Nevamar: Product - Arp Surface Plastic Laminate. C. Formica: Product - Plastic Laminate. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. CUSTOM CASEWORK SECTION 06410 - 3 2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: AWI, 0.050 inch General Purpose quality; three colors/patterns at Desk Sergeant Area and one in the Property Room, and matte surface texture. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive or Type recommended by AWI to suit application B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Screws: Of size and type to suit application; steel finish in concealed locations and brass finish in exposed locations. D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.9. B. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to the Drawings for cabinet hardware and all associated hardware accessories required for this Section. 2.07 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Stain, Varnish and Finishing Materials: As specified in Section 09900. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for full length only. C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. D. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; overlay style. E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arrises. 2.09 FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. CUSTOM CASEWORK SECTION 06410 - 4 r-• B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which -- matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Seal, stain and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Brush apply only. E. Seal stain and varnish internal exposed to view and semi -concealed surfaces. Brush apply only. F. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles I" and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures. using "Wet Method". END OF SECTION CUSTOM CASEWORK SECTION 06410 - 5 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Sill under Glass Unit Masonry. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Prime and finish painting. 1.03 REFERENCES _ A. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. B. FS SS-C-153 - Cement, Bituminous, Plastic. C. NAAMM - Metal Finishes Handbook. _ D. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Work of this Section is to protect interior floor surface from water leakage beneath glass block. _ 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with three years minimum experience. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Describe material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, and installation details. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.07 STORAGE AND HANDLING ry A. Store products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07620 - 1 C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525, G90; 24 gage core steel. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous. B. Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153, Type I -asphaltic cement. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. C. Form material with flat lock seam. D. Solder and seal metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. 2.04 FINISH A. Shop prepare and prime exposed ferrous metal surfaces. B. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. B. Lap and seal all joints. C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and concrete slab. D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make surfaces true and straight in planes and lines accurate to profiles. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07620 - 2 E. Solder metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. F. Seal metal joints watertight. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Conform to drawing details included in SMACNA manual. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07620 - 3 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sealants used in conjunction with sheet metal flashing. B. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors: Sealants used in conjunction with door frames. "- C. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames: Sealants used in conjunction with steel frames for doors. D. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods. E. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction with rated wall construction. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. B. ANSI/ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open -Cell Foam). C. ASTM C790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds. D. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent -Release Type Sealants. E. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. F. FS TT-C-00598 - Calking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type. G. FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, solvent Release Type. H. FS TT-S-00227 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi -Component. I. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component. J. FS TT-S-001543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base. JOINT SEALERS SECTION 07900 - 1 K. SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, color and availability C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide three year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Polysulphide Sealant: FS TT-S-00230, Type II - non -sag, Class A; color as selected; manufactured by Pecora or Dap. JOINT SEALERS SECTION 07900 - 2 B. Polyurethane Sealant: FS TT-S-00230, Type II - non -sag, Class A; color; as selected; manufactured by Pecora or Dap. C. Silicone Sealant: FS TT-S-01543, Class A, low molulus type; color; as selected; manufactured by Pecora or Dap. D. Butyl Sealant: FS TT-S-001657, black color; as manufactured by �^ Pecora or Dap. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION �- A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces and substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. JOINT SEALERS SECTION 07900 - 3 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Tool joints concave. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Protect sealants until cured. 3.06 SCHEDULE Location Type Color A. Window perimeter Polysulphide Dark Brown B. Door Frame/Walls Polyurethane Dark Brown C. Under Thresholds Butyl Black D. Rated Wall Joints Silicone White E. Flashing Seams Butyl Black END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS SECTION 07900 - 4 SECTION 08111 STANDARD STEEL DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated steel doors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04100 - Mortar: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames. B. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames. C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. D. Section 08712 - Door Hardware. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. B. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. .� C. ASTM C236 - Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot -Box. D. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. E. Door Hardware Institute (DHI) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and finish. C. Product Data: Indicate door configurations, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE STANDARD STEEL DOORS SECTION 08111 - 1 A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI-100 and ANSI A117.1. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Non -Construction: Conform to UL 10B. B. Installed Door Assembly: Conform to applicable codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR MANUFACTURERS A. Republic Builders Products B. Fenestra Corporation. C. Steel Craft. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 DOORS A. Exterior Doors Thermally Broken: SDI-100 Grade II Model 2 Level B. STANDARD STEEL DOORS SECTION 08111 - 2 0 2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Face: Steel sheet in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100. B. Core: polyurethane. C. Thermal Insulated Door: Total insulation R value as measured in accordance with ASTM C236. 2.04 ACCESSORIES w, A. Removeable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. B. Primer: zinc chromate type. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place. B. Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with inverted steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight. C. Configure exterior doors with special profile to receive recessed weatherstripping. 2.06 FINISH A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 G60. B. Primer: Baked. C. Factory Finish: Primer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01039. — B. verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100 and DHI. B. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames — specified in Section 08112 and hardware specified in Section 08710. C. Touch-up factory primed doors. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, ,., STANDARD STEEL DOORS SECTION 08111 - 3 corner to corner. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. See the Drawings for Door Schedule type. END OF SECTION STANDARD STEEL DOORS SECTION 08111 - 4 M_ SECTION 08112 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated and/or fire rated, as applicable, steel frames. ,r 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Placement of anchors into wall construction. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04100 - Mortar: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames. B. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors. C. Section 08211 - Wood Doors. D. Section 08712 - Door Hardware. E. Section 08800 - Glazing. F. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of frames. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ANSI/SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. r.. D. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. E. DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel '- Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. .., F. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. G. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. H. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. STANDARD STEEL FRAMES SECTION 08112 1 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, and finish. C. Product Data: Indicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacings, location of cut-outs for hardware, reinforcement. D. Samples: Submit two samples of frame, full size cross section, inches illustrating factory finished frame colors and surface texture. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI-100 and ANSI A117.1. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rated Frame Construction: Conform to ASTM E152 or NFPA 252 or UL 10B. B. Installed Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class same as fire door. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation. STANDARD STEEL FRAMES SECTION 08112 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAME MANUFACTURERS A. Ceco Corporation Product: Steel Frame. B. Steel Craft Manufacturing Co. Product: Steel Frame. C. Fenestra Corporation Product: Steel Frame. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 FRAMES A. Exterior Frames: 16 gage thick material, base metal thickness. B. Interior Frames: 16 gage thick material, base metal thickness. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Silencers: Resilient rubber fitted into drilled hole. B. Removeable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. C. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion. D. Primer: Zinc chromate type. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames as welded unit or for knock down field assembly or for drywall slip-on typeas condition dictates. B. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes where required. C. Terminate door stops 4 inches above finished floor. Cut stop at 45 degree angle and close. D. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors on strike side. E. Configure exterior frames with special profile to receive recessed weatherstripping. F. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 inch head member. "- 2.05 FINISH A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 G60. B. Primer: Air dried. STANDARD STEEL FRAMES SECTION 08112 - 3 C. Factory Finish: Primer. D. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100 and DHI. B. Coordinate with masonry and/or wallboard wall construction for anchor placement. C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. D. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710 and doors in Section 08111 and 08211. E. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Refer to the Drawings for schedule of frame types. END OF SECTION STANDARD STEEL FRAMES SECTION 08112 - 4 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non -rated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames: Steel door frames. B. Section 08712 - Door Hardware. ., C. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI/HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. C. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. E. AWI - Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. F. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. G. NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. H. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. I. Warnock -Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, ,-. types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, or other requirements as necessary. C. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics; factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria, and other data as necesssary. -� D. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 12 x 12 inch in size cut from corner of door. FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 - 1 E. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1300, Custom Grade. B. Finish doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1500. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to ASTM E152 or NFPA 252 or UL 10B. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term: 1. Exterior Doors: Five (5) years. FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 - 2 2. Interior Doors: Two (2) years. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Algoma Hardwoods Product: Wood Doors. B. Eggers Industries Product: Wood Doors. C. Weyerhouser Corporation Product: Wood Doors. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 DOOR TYPES A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core construction fire rated, if indicated. 2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Core (Solid, Non -Rated): AWI Section 1300, Type PC -Particleboard. B. Core (Solid, Fire Rated): AWI Section 1300, Type FD 1-1/2. 2.04 FLUSH DOOR FACING A. Veneer Facing (Flush Interior Doors): AWI Custom quality species wood, rotary cut, with book matched grain, end matched transoms, for transparent finish. 2.05 ADHESIVE A. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate non -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and to UL requirements. Attach fire rating label to door. - C. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. D. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Of same species as veneer facing. Hardwood for transparent finish. E. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. .. FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 - 3 F. Bond edge banding to cores. G. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. H. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings. 2.07 FINISH A. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fire rated and non -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard, NFPA 80 and to Warnock Hersey requirements. B. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. Use threaded through bolts for half surface hinges. E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08112 and hardware specified in Section 08710. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to AWI Section 1300 requirements for maximum diagonal distortion. C. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 - 4 I - 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. See Drawings for the Door Schedule. END OF SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 - 5 SECTION 08712 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Hardware for wood and hollow steel doors. 1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Not Used. 1.03 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Furnish templates to Section 08111 for frame preparation. 1.04 RELATED WORK A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. B. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors. C. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames. D. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Door. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute. D. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association. E. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute. F. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. H. SDI - Steel Door Institute. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware. DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08712 - 1 r- P- 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years experience. B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying institutional door hardware with three years documented experience. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to all applicable codes for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. B. Conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101. 1.09 CERTIFICATIONS A. Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect complete installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. B. Provide two copies of certifications to Architect/Engineer. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. C. Provide product data on specified hardware. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. E. Submit samples of hinge and latchset illustrating style, color, and finish. F. Samples: May be incorporated into the Work. G. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. H. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that fire rated hardware meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08712 - 2 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. D. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. - E. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in secure area. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage of door closers. 1.14 EXTRA STOCK: Not Used. 1.15 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OWNER PROVIDED HARDWARE A. The Owner will provide the "cylinders" for appropriate locksets. 1. The Contractor shall provide a detailed list of this type of hardware to be used in this project. This information is for the Owner's reference and coordination. Hardware shall not be ordered until confirmation, in writing, has been received from the Owner. Contractor shall provide construction locks as required. 2. The Contractor shall pick up these items where indicated by the Owner. 3. The Contractor shall install, adjust and activate the hardware supplied by the owner. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Best, no substitutions. DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08712 - 3 A - 2.03 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. The Owner will provide prekeyed lock cylinders to the Contractor for installation in the latter stages of construction. B. The Contractor shall provide temporary cylinders for construction use until installation of Owner provided hardware. C. Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver. D. Provide keys of nickel -silver. E. Door Locks: Master keyed including construction keying control keying for core removeable cylinders. Verify exact requirements with the Owner prior to any work being done or materials being ordered. F. Notify the Architect in writing that Owner requirements have been verified prior to ordering materials. G. Supply keys in the following quantities: 1. One master key. 2. Two construction keys. 3. One control key. 2.04 FINISHES A. Finishes are identified in Hardware Schedule on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI, AWI, ANSI/NFPA 80 and BHMA. B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item to be as recommended by manufacturer, shown on shop drawings and as approved by the Architect. D. Conform to ANSI A117.1 for positioning requirements for the handicapped. �- DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08712 - 4 3.03 A. SCHEDULE Reference Hardware schedule on the drawings. B. One (1) Unisex Handicapped Sign: Engraved plastic, blue with white lettering 8 inch x 14 inch. END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08712 - 5 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass, Plastic and Glazing for hollow metal work, windows and glazed walls. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Components with requirement for glass. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. C. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames. D. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. B. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. C. ASTM E546 - Test Method For Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. D. ASTM E576 - Test Method For Dew/Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical Position. E. ASTM E773 - Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. F. FGMA - Glazing Manual. G. FGMA - Sealant Manual. H. FS TT-C-00598 - Calking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type. I. FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent Release Type. J. FS TT-S-00227 - Sealing Compound, Rubber Base, Two Component. K. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compounds, Synthetic -Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically Curing. L. FS TT-S-01543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base. M. FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Metal) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for Channel or Stop Glazing). GLAZING SECTION 08800 -1 N. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data on Glass and Plastic Types Specified: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating glass and plastic units, coloration and design. E. Samples: Submit 6 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that glass and plastic, meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 . QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Ford Glass Company. B. Libby -Owens Ford Company. GLAZING SECTION 08800 -2 P-. C. PPG Industries. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Safety Glass (Type FG-B): Clear laminated with .030 inch thick plastic interlayer conforming to ANSI Z97.1; 1/4 inch thick . B. Mirror Glass (Type FG-H): Clear tempered safety type with silver coating,organic overcoating, arrised edges, 1/4 inch thick 18 inch wide x 24inch high - provide one (1) only in Police Property room. C. Tempered obscure 1/4 inch thick glass, frosted pattern. ^" D. Wired Glass (Type FG-G): Opaque glass, diagonal mesh of woven stainless steel wire of 1/2" grid size, 1/4" thick. E. Plastic Sheet - Polycarbonate Sheet (Type PS -A): ANSI Z97.1; plastic compound, clear; ultraviolt stabilized, acrylate non - yellowing coating for scratch resistance, 1/4" thick. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS - GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Norton Glazing Products. B. Tremco Glazing Systems. C. PPG Industries. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.04 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Modified Oil (Type GC -A): FS TT-G-410; gray color. B. Butyl Sealant (Type GC-B): Single Component; Shore A hardness of 10-20 black color; non -skinning. m.. C. Polysulphide Sealant (Type GC-D): Two component, chemical curing, non -sagging type; cured Shore A hardness of 15 - 25, color as selected. D. Polyurethane Sealant (Type GC-E): Single component, chemical curing, non -staining, non -bleeding, non -sagging type, Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35. E. Silicone Sealant (Type GC-F): Single component, solvent curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non -bleeding non -staining; -cured Shore A hardness of 15-25 color '-` as selected. 2.05 MANUFACTURERS - GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Norton Glazing Products. GLAZING SECTION 08800 -3 B. Tremco Glazing Systems. C. PPG Industries. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed buty compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size, as required; black color. D. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; color as selected.. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. F. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify prepared openings under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. 3.03 INTERIOR - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch above sight line. GLAZING SECTION 08800 -4 B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. -° C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert - pressure on tape for full continuous contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape. 3.04 INSTALLATION - MIRRORS A. Set mirrors with clips. Anchor rigidly to wall construction. B. Place plumb and level. 3.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Inspection will monitor quality of glazing. _ 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. °- B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. C. Remove labels after work is complete. D. Clean glass and mirrors. 3.07 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500 . B. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION GLAZING SECTION 08800 -5 SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Portland cement plaster system. B. Smooth surface finish. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System: Wall substrate surface. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement. B. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. C. ASTM C206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime. D. ASTM C207 — Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. E. ASTM C631 - Bonding Compounds for Interior Plastering. F. ASTM C897 - Aggregate for Job -Mixed Portland Cement Based Plasters. G. ASTM C926 - Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster. H. ASTM E119 - Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. I. PCA (Portland Cement Association) - Plaster (Stucco) Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C926 or PCA Plaster Manual. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER SECTION 09220 - 1 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50 degrees F nor more than 80 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of plaster and until cured. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gold Bond Building Products. B. United States Gypsum Company. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 PLASTER BASE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I Portland. B. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S. C. Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C897. D. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster. E. Bonding Agent: ASTM C631; type recommended for bonding plaster to concrete masonry surfaces. 2.03 PLASTER FINISH MATERIALS A. Cement: As specified for plaster base coat, white color. B. Lime: As specified for plaster base coat. C. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster. 2.04 CEMENT PLASTER MIXES A. Mix and proportion cement plaster in accordance with PCA Plaster (Stucco) Manual. B. Base Coat and Brown Coat: One part cement, minimum 3-1/2 and maximum 4 parts aggregate, and minimum 15 percent and maximum.25 percent hydrated lime. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER SECTION 09220 - 2 C. Finish Coat: Premix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set. E. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water. F. Add air entrainment admixtures to finish coat to provide 5-7 percent entrainment. G. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and. evaporation. H. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces and site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this Section. Verify no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction. B. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter. Clean surfaces using acid solutions, solvents, or detergents. Wash surfaces with clean water. C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 PLASTERING A. Apply plaster in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply brown coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch, and a finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch over concrete masonry surfaces or as required to match existing wall thickness. C. Moist cure brown coats. D. After curing, dampen base coat prior to applying finish coat. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER SECTION 09220 - 3 E. Apply finish coat and steel trowelto a smooth and consistent finish. F. Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay troweling as long as possible to avoid drawing excess fines to surface. _.. G. Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 48 hours. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. END OF SECTION PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER SECTION 09220 - 4 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Gypsum board. C. Taped and sanded joint treatment. D. Texture finish. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS - A. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. B. ASTM C79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board. C. ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction. D. ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard. E. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board. F. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. - G. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. H. ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. I. GA-201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings. - J. GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. _ 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. - B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape; and decorative finish. _ GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS SECTION 09260 - 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section [with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM A. United States Gypsum Products. B. Gold Bond Building Products C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS n A. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet -steel, 20 gage thick, C shape, with serrated faces and 1-5/8 inch flanges. ^^ B. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. C. Fasteners: ASTM C514. D. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. E. Adhesive: ASTM C557. 2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A Corner Beads: Metal. B. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216; Type LC bead. C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS SECTION 09260 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.] 3.02 METAL STUD INSTALLATION A. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754. B. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center. C. Extend stud framing to ceiling only. Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling framing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. E. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. F. Blocking: Nail wood blocking to studs. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of wall cabinets. 3.03 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION A. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete block walls. B. Erect furring channels horizontally or vertically]; space maximum 24 inches on center, not more than 4 inches from floor and - ceiling lines. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 3.04 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with ASTM C754. B. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. C. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. D. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of openings. E. Laterally brace entire suspension system. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS SECTION 09260 - 3 r-. 3.05 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA-201, GA-216 and GA- 600]. B. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or .� framing. D. Double Layer Applications: Secure second layer to first with fasteners. E. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. F. Place corner beads at external corners as indicated. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS SECTION 09260 - 4 SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim. B. Acoustical panels. C. Non -Fire rated assembly. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. C. ASTM E580 - Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. D. ASTM E1264 - Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. E. Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA) - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. F. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes,and interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal grid system components and, acoustical units. D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. E. Samples: Submit two samples each, 6 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, edge trim, and suspension wire. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention under provisions of Section 01300. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SECTION 09511 - 1 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical ^� unit installation. 1.05 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 01010. B. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. C. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide two (2) cartons of extra tile to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Non -Fire Rated Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty; exposed T; components die cut and interlocking. B. Grid Materials: Cold rolled aluminum.. �b C. Exposed Grid Surface Width: 15/16 inch. D. Grid Finish: White color. E. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings, and hold down clips as required for suspended grid system. R F. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized Primed steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTICAL UNITS ,. A. USG Interiors, Inc. Product: Auratone - Police Property Room, Square Edge. B. USG Interiors, Inc. Product: Auratone - Desk Sargeant - Tegular Edge. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SECTION 09511 - 2 C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.04 ACOUSTICAL UNIT MATERIALS A. Acoustical Panels: ASTM E1264, conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Composition: Mineral. 4. Edge: Square, Police Property Room. Tegular, Desk Sargeant. 5. Surface Color: White. 6. Surface Finish: Directional fissured. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION - LAY -IN GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this section. B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. D. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Supply hangers or inserts for installation with instructions for their correct placement. F. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. I. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. J. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SECTION 09511 - 3 P_ K. Form expansion joints as required. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement. Maintain visual closure. L. Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board above light fixtures in accordance with UL assembly requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Lay directional patterned units in basket weave pattern. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. F. Cut panels to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. Field rabbett panel edge. G. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 ft of an exterior door. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. See Drawings for locations of Suspended Acoustical Ceiling. END OF SECTION SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SECTION 09511 - 4 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. B. Resilient base. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. FS L-F-1641 - Floor Covering, Translucent or Transparent Vinyl Surface, with Backing. C. FS L-F-475 - Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing. D. FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Non-metallic, Non-skid. E. FS SS=T7312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition. F. FS SS-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS _ A. Conform to applicable code for flame/ fuel/smoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance] characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material specified. E. Submit two 12 inch long samples of base material for each color specified. F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09650 - 1 P- 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit cleaning and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. .,v B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,' and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 36 sq ft of flooring and 24 lineal feet of base of each material specified under provisions of Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - TILE FLOORING A. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Azrock Floor Products Division, Azrock Industries, Inc. C. Tarkett. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 TILE FLOORING MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV, Composition 1; 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8 inch thick; plain design. ,.M 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BASE MATERIALS A. Roppe Rubber Corporation. B. Flexco Division, Textile Rubber Company. C. Johnson Rubber Company. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.04 BASE MATERIALS A. Base: FS SS-W-40, Type I rubber; 4 and 6 inch high; thick; top set coved; premolded external corners, as noted on Plans. RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09650 - 2 B. Base Accessories: Premolded end stops and external corners, of same material, size, and color as base. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex or type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Edge Strips: Flooring material. D. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft, and are ready to receive Work. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. - C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile patterns. RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09650 - 3 0 EN F. Install tile with pattern grain alternating with adjacent unit to produce basket weave pattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. G. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. H. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates. I. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets,, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. J. Install flooring under movable partitions without interrupting floor pattern. K. Install different colored tile in patter where indicated on Plans. Fit joints tightly. 3.04 INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. See Drawings for Schedule. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09650 - 4 SECTION 09688 CARPET -GLUE DOWN PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpeting glue down method. B. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. FS DDD-C-95 - Carpets and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic. D. FS DDD-C-0095 - Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic, Polyester, Polypropylene. E. FS DDD-C-1559 - Carpet, Loop, Low Pile Height, High Density, Woven or Tufted with Attached Cushioning. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams and direction of carpet. C. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. E. Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified. F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. CARPET -GLUE DOWN SECTION 09688 - 1 P.-- B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning and shampooing. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in woven carpet with three years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for carpet flammability requirements in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. ., B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) ambient temperature three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 144 sq ft of carpeting of each color specified, under provisions of Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Mohawk. B. Bigelow - Sanford. C. Lees Carpet. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02. MATERIALS A. Woven Carpet: Conforming to the following criteria: Yarn Construction and Pile Fiber 100o Antron C.F. Nylon Max. Electrostatic Charge 3 Kv @ 20 percent R.H. Pile Height .230 inch Stitches per Inch 9 Primary Backing Synthetic Total Weight 30 oz/sq yd Roll Width 12 ft Color [and Design] Like Mohawk Supertron, Color as selected. •- CARPET -GLUE DOWN SECTION 09688 - 2 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sub -Floor Filler: White premix latex or type recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended by carpet manufacturer. C. Edge Strips: Extruded or molded heavy duty rubber type, color as selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft and are ready to receive work. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of i percent; and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum floor surface. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with manufacturers, instructions. B. Lay out rolls of carpet for approval. C. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. D. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. E. Locate seams in area of least traffic. F. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps. G. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction as CARPET -GLUE DOWN SECTION 09688 - 3 anticipated traffic. H. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous -- through a wall opening into another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. I. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions. J. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove access adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION r� A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation. END OF SECTION � CARPET -GLUE DOWN SECTION 09688 - 4 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1 A. Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shop primed items. B. Section 06413 - Custom Casework: Shop finished cabinet work. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. C. AWWA (American Water Works Association) - C204 - Chlorinated - Rubber -Alkyd Paint Systems for the Exterior of Above Ground Steel Water Piping. D. AWWA (American Water Works Association) - D102 - Painting Steel Water Storage Tanks. E. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) - Industrial Maintenance Painting. F. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) - Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications. G. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) - Painting - Architectural Specifications Manual. H. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention. PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 1 r- 2 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section [with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes. 1.08 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field sample of paint under provisions of Section 01400. ,®-. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. -- B._ Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. C. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 2 3 E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide 1 gallon of each color and type to Owner. C. Label each container with color, type, texture and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PAINT, VARNISH AND URETHENE STAIN A. Manufacturers: 1. Kelly Moore. 2. PPG Industries. 3. Sherwin Williams. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Patching Materials: Latex filler. 2.03 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of section for surface finish schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 3 P.. 4 D. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 4. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects. C. Seal with shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. F. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. G. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid -alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. H. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for a Paint Finish: Remove contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent washing. Apply vinyl etch primer immediately following cleaning. I. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for a Natural Oxidized Finish: Remove contamination by applying oxidizing solution of copper acetate and ammonium chloride in acetic acid. Rub on repeatedly for required effect. Once attained, rinse surfaces with clear water and allow to dry. J. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. 01- K. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. N PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 4 5 L. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. M. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. N. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. O. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose, primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. P. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Q. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. R. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Apply each coat to uniform finish. D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 5 6 H. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. I. Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork with primer paint. J. Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.07 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES NOTE: Existing painted surfaces (walls, wood trim, and metal window) as to be repainted as part of this Project. Existing stained or clear finished wood surfaces are not a part of this Project. A. Wood - Painted (Cabinet Interiors) 1. One coat PPG-6-6 Speedhide Enamel Undercoat. 2. Two coats PPG 6-90 Speedhide Alkyd Low Sheen, Colors as selected by Architect. .� B. Wood - Transparent 1. Filler coat (for open grained wood only). 2. One coat PPG 77-302 Rez Semi -Transparent Alkyd -Oil Interior Stain. 3. Two coats PPG 77-7 Rez Varnish Satin clear, Colors as selected by Architect. r. C. Steel - Primed (Steel Door and Window Frames) 1. Touch-up with original primer. 2. Two coats PPG 6-510 Speedhide Latex Enamel, semi -gloss, Colors as selected by Architect. D. Steel - Galvanized 1. One coat zinc chromate primer. 2. Two coats PPG 6-510 Speedhide Latex Enamel, semi -gloss, Colors as selected by Architect. E. Gypsum Board A. Apply Orange Peel Texture for new walls; otherwise, match existing texture on existing walls. 1. One coat PPG 6-2 Speedhide Latex Primer -Sealer. .. 2. Two coats PPG 6-510 Speedhide Latex Enamel, semi -gloss, Colors as selected by Architect. PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 6 7 F. Plaster 1. One coat PPG 6-2 Speedhide Latex Primer -Sealer. 2. Two coats PPg 6-510 Speedhide Latex Enamel, semi -gloss, Colors asselected by Architect. END OF SECTION PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 7 0 SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet accessories. B. Attachment hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08800 - Glazing: Wall mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ANSI/ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. C. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. D. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. E. ANSI/ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. F. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit two samples of each component illustrating color and finish. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.05 KEYING A. Supply two keys for each accessory to Owner. mi TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SECTION 10800 - 1 B. Master key all accessories. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ANSI A117.1. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. American Specialties, Inc. B. Bobrick Washroom Equipment. C. McKinney/Parker. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A366. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. D. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof. F. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet•of stock, free of joints. C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SECTION 10800 - 2 F. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. G. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Galvanizing: ANSI/ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz/sq yd. B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. C. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel. D. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ANSI/ASTM B456, Type SC 2 polished finish. E. Stainless Steel: Polished finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions and substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Refer to the Drawings for the Schedule of Toilet Accessories. END OF SECTION TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SECTION 10800 - 3 11180_- GENERAL CONDITIONS - HOLDING EQUIPMENT 1.01: The Holding Equipment Subcontractor shall be res- ponsible for the execution of his work in accordance with contract drawings and specifications. Other Con- tractors shall likewise be responsible for their work being in accordance with dimensions and construction shown on contract drawings and shall be responsible for and correct their errors in the work. Holding Equipment Subcontractor shall call to the attention of the Architect any discrepancies between equipment Holding Contractors shop drawings and the contract drawings. Discrepancies that may occur during constru- ction of the building shall be immediately reported to the Architect and the Holding Equipment Subcontractor for resolution. Other Contractors shall not proceed with work affecting Holding Equipment until such dis- crepancies have been resolved. 1.02: Holding Equipment Subcontractor shall deliver and be responsible for placing in the building all Holding Equipment that he is to install as part of his con- tract. 1.03: Holding Equipment Installation shall not be started until the Holding area is broom clean and properly lit, exterior enclosing walls are in place, and roof completely installed to prevent weather damage to the locking mechanisms and other mechanical parts of the Holding Equipment, and written notice is received by the Holding Equipment Contractor from the General Contractor that these conditions exist at the building site. 1.04: The General Contractor shall complete all floor finish, concrete curbs, waterproofing and other concrete work, where shown or specified in connection with the Holding Equipment, and all plastering and painting on or near Holding Equipment after Detention Equipment is completely erected in building. 1.05: The Holding Equipment Subcontractor will cut out all necessary holes in steel Holding Equipment required for proper installation of plumbing, heating, and electrical and ventilation work. Holes are to be laid out with center punch marks on the holding equipment by the Contractors requiring these holes, which will be cut by the Holding Equipment Subcontractor in accordance with these punch masks. Contractors requir- ing holes in steel Holding Equipment shall be res- ponsible for proper location and sizes of holes. Chan- ges required after holes have been cut shall be at the expense of the Contractor requiring such changes. Holes shall be laid and cut during installation of the Holding Equipment and prior to finish painting. GENERAL CONDITIONS - HOLDING EQUIPMENT 11180 - 1 r- 1.06: The Mechanical Contractor shall install heating and ventilating ducts where required in the Holding areas �., after the Holding equipment is equipment is erected in place. Any changes or modifications from contract drawings and/or Holding Equipment Contractors shop drawings made by the mechanical contractor which affect security vents, grilles or other Detention equipment shall be at the expense of the mechanical contractor. Holding Equipment Subcontractor shall be notified of such changes before they are made. The mechanical Contractor shall reimburse the Holding Equipment Subcontractor for any additional expense resulting form such changes. 1.07: The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all field wiring and conduits and make all necessary .► field connections for the electrical operation of the Holding Equipment locking devices, electrical locks, and controls therefore, in accordance with with the Holding Equipment Subcontractors approved electrical shop drawings. Electrical Contractor shall also furnish and install all necessary electrical com- ponents including, but not limited to, conduits, wiring and lamps, all shall make all necessary con- nections for for the holding type electric light fixtures. 1.08: All Holding Equipment herein specified, except aluminum, bronze or stainless steel finish hardware and parts of the work to be enameled or plated, shall be painted one shop coat of rust -resistant red oxide metallic primer, before shipping. Retouching of the shop coat of paint and finish painting of all Holding Equipment shall be done by the painting Subcontractor, under the supervision of the General Contractor. All burns, welds and weld spatter on Holding Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned by the Holding Equipment Subcontractor. Mortar, plaster, concrete, water- proofing, dust and other foreign matter on the Holding Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned by the General Contractor. END OF SECTION 11180 GENERAL CONDITIONS - HOLDING EQUIPMENT 11180 - 2 GN 11190 - HOLDING EQUIPMENT: PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01: SCOPE A. Furnish all plant, labor, equipment, appliances, ser- vices and materials and perform all work in connection with the installation of Holding Equipment, complete, in accordance with the specifications and the applic- able drawings. B. Related work to be performed by other trades as a part of this contract 1. Unloading, handling and setting of items which are to be embedded in masonry or concrete. 2. Field cleaning, touch-up and finish painting. 1.02: CODES A. All work shall be in compliance with the latest editions (and revisions thereto) of the following codes and requirements: 1. State and local codes, ordinances and regulations 2. Occupational Safety & Health Administration, U.S. Dept of Labor B. In any instance where these specifications call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the codes, the provi- sions of these specifications shall take precedence. the codes shall govern in any case of direct conflict between the code and the specifications and drawings. 1.03: QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers of Holding Equipment to be furnished under this section must have been engaged in active production of detention Equipment for a period of ten years immediately prior to the current date. During this ten year period, the manufacturer must have pro- duced at least five installations of similar character and magnitude as the work specified herein. These installations must have been in continuous and satis- factory use for more than five years each. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Holding equipment by one of the following; 1. Southern Steel 2. Roanoak Iron & Steel C. Testing laboratory shall be recognized independent testing laboratory capable of complying with ASTM Standard E329. Cost of required testing shall be borne by the Holding Equipment Contractor. D. Certification and reports shall be furnished direct to the Holding Equipment Subcontractor with a copy for transmittal to the Architect. E. The model numbers indicated herein are those of South- ern Steel. Equal products of other manufacturer are acceptable pending proof of equivalency and coordina- tion of product. HOLDING EQUIPMENT 11190 - 1 1.04: SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings showing sizes, details of construction, ... method of assembling, hardware and other details shall be Submitted in accordance with the requirements of the General conditions for approval of all items spe- cified herein. Manufacturer's cuts and printed des- criptive literature will be acceptable, provided the required detailed information is shown thereon. B. Test reports attesting to compliance with the specifi- cations requirements for tool -resisting steel, shall be Submitted prior to delivery of the material to the project site. C. Guarantee Prior to final acceptance; Holding Equipment Subcontractor shall provide a written warranty covering door operating and locking mechanisms. War- ranty shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of �. all door operating and locking mechanisms for a period of one year after final acceptance, and during this period, Holding Equipment Subcontractor shall, with- out cost to the owner, make any necessary adjustments to the mechanism or replace any worn or broken parts due either to faulty material or defective construc- tion. D. Models; Each Holding Equipment Subcontractor may be required to -Submit, for inspection by the Architect and Owner, a dwarf cell front model of the locking and operating system specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01: MATERIALS: All the materials specified for the work herein shall be new and produced especially for Holding use or shall conform with accepted standards of the Holding Equipment industry. 2.02: EQUIPMENT: A. Door locking and operating systems: --� 1. Locks and Hardware; Holding type (paracentric) locks shall be heavy duty, lever tumbler type. Lock cases shall be ductile or malleable iron or steel, with covers of cold rolled steel. Cases and covers shall be galvanized. Cylinders shall be silicon bronze. Locks shall have a minimum of five lever tumblers of spring temper brass, each actuated by a. flat, phosphor �- spring. 2. Keys for Holding locks shall be silicon bronze/copper alloy having a tensile strength of 60, 000 p..s.i., a. yield strength of 20, 000 p.s.i. and a Rockwell hardness of B 73/75. Furnish three keys for keys for each key change. All keys are to be stamped with designated identifying number of letter. 3. Key Schedule. Furnish complete key schedule for all locks to be provided under this section. Architect or owners representative shall provide Holding Equipment HOLDING EQUIPMENT 11190 - 2 Subcontractor with the required information for prepa- ration of the key schedule. 4. Hinges for Holding doors. Swinging doors constructed of steel plate or grating shall be hung on two or three (depending on door size and weight) #205 hinges or equal. Small access doors, food passes, shut- ters, etc. shall be hung on two bronze bearing hinges of ample size for weight carried and of a type de- signed especially for Holding use. 5. Door pulls shall be #212 raised pull, #214 recessed pull or #215 knob pull (in accordance with Holding Door/Hardware Schedule) or equal. 6. Door Stops; Holding door/hardware schedule indicates doors to be provided with stops for limiting swings of doors in the open position. Provide steel plate and grating doors, when indicated, with 3/8" thick steel bar stops near top & bottom of door, securely welded in place. Door stops are not required at doors equip- ped with closers. B. Accessories: Observation panels shall be #250 glazed with not less than 1 3/16" security glass, composed of three layers of clear float glass with two interlayers of polyvinyl butyral. Composite glass shall weigh not less than 9.75 pounds per square foot. C. Doors l.. Mild steel plate work; Shall be 3/16" thick. Plates butting together in a straight line, forming. walls may be connected and stiffened, where practical, with double 2"x2"x3/16" angles on one side and 3/16"x4" battens opposite side. Bottom edges may be framed and stiffened with 2"x2"x3/16" angle on one side and 3/16"x2" trim bar on opposite side, except where plate walls set against masonry or concrete walls, or as detailed on the drawings. Vertical cor- ners may be connected with 2"x2"x3/16" angle on inside and 2-1/2" 2-1/2"x3/16"angle outside. Ceiling plates may be connected with double 2"x2-1/2"x3/16" angle on outside, where practical, and 3/16"x4" battens on inside or with 1/4"x4"x3" tee sections. Where space above plate ceiling is insufficient for filed riveting or welding, angles shall be placed on underside and bar omitted; plate work connecting with grating work may be connected with 2"x2 1/2"x3/16" angles; joints between framing members of grating and connections and method of construction may be used Subject to the Architects approval. Additional.or heavier stiffening and supporting members necessary shall be provided; and, when erected in building, all plate work shall be free from twists, bends or open joints. D. Guarantee: The Contractor shall guarantee that all work shall be sound, waterproof and free from defects for a period of one year from the date of Substantial completion under normal use. HOLDING EQUIPMENT 11190 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01: Riveting and bolting; Rivets not otherwise specified shall be 3/8" diameter, accurately spaced from 4"-6" on centers as the nature of the work requires, and well driven down to completely fill the holes. Holes to be punched not to exceed 1/16" larger in diameter than rivets used and holes not matching properly shall be reamed. Counter sunk flat head rivets or chipped heads may be used where necessary for mechanical or other reasons. Where legs of stiffening angles or other other shapes are not exposed to inmates or public view, they may be bolted together where practi- cal with 3/8" diameter bolts spaced not more than 6" on centers. Where bolted work does not reduce sec- urity, special 3/8" diameter oval head bolts may be used where heads are exposed to inmates and where nuts are not accessible to inmates or exposed to view. Other recognized Holding Equipment manufacturers stan- dard shapes, connections and methods of construction may be Subject to the Architects approval. 3.02: Welding. A. Execute in a neat workmanlike manner, in accordance with standards established by the American Welding Society. Clean loose scale, rust oil, or other foreign matter from surfaces to be welded. Welds shall show uniform sections, good penetration, smoothness of weld metal and a minimum of craters, porosity and clinkers. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth. B. Electric arc and resistant welding may be used in the fabrication and erection of this work where practical and where the security is equal to or stronger than riveting and where reasonably neat workmanship is possible. Welding shall be executed in a neat workman- like manner, in accordance with standards establis- hed by the American Welding Society. Clean loose scale, rust, or other foreign matter from surfaces to be welded. Welds shall show uniform sections, good penetration, smoothness of weld metal, a minimum of craters, porosity, and clinkers. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth. 3.03: Painting and finishing of the Holding Equipment; All ^— Holding Equipment herein specified, except aluminum, bronze or stainless steel finish hardware and parts of the work to be enameled or plated, shall be painted one shop coat of rust -resistant metallic primer, red oxide color before shipping. Retouching of the shop coat of paint and finish painting of all Holding Equipment after installation and final adjustment of the Holding Equipment shall be done by the Painting Subcontractor under the supervision of the General Contractor at no cost to the Holding Equipment Sub - HOLDING EQUIPMENT 11190 - 4 contractor. All burns, weld and weld spatter on Holding Equipment caused by the Holding Equipment Subcontractor shall thoroughly cleaned by the Holding Equipment Contractor. Mortar, plaster, concrete, waterproofing, dust and other foreign matter on the Holding Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned by the General Contractor. END OF SECTION 11190 HOLDING EQUIPMENT 11190 - 5 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL 1. GENERAL• (A) The following general provisions shall apply to all sections under the provisions for Plumbing, HVAC and Electrical. (B) Requirements of the conditions of the contract of these specifications apply to all work under this section of the specifications. 2. CHECKING DOCUMENTS: (A) The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecu- tively. Each Contractor shall check these drawings and specif- ications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notifica- tion, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings and/or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the Contract Documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete Contract. 3. DRAWINGS: (A) The plans accompanying these specifications are intended to show the general arrangement and the extent of the work con- templated. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined after equipment has been approved by the Architect and as directed by the Architect. All materials or labor necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these specifications shall be furnished by each Contractor without additional charge as if called for in these specifica- tions or shown on the plans. (B) Each Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the existing structure and systems involved under this contract ,before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these conditions. Each Contractor shall core all concrete where required to accommodate piping or conduit; chipping of concrete will not be allowed. (C) Each Contractor shall schedule any utility interruptions with the Owner or Architect prior to preforming the work required and all interruptions shall be kept to a. minimum. (D) Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposed to install require other space conditions, supports or clearances other than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such items with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. 15010-1 0 (E) This Contractor shall thoroughly lay out all his work and check all conditions to insure that the work as shown on the Drawings can be installed without modifications. No`material shall be fabricated or delivered to the job until these condi- tions have been determined. (F) The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to make changes during construction, if required, and no allowances will be made for prefabricated material or on job materials which can not be used due to actual conditions. 4. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS: (A) Where manufacturer's names are mentioned in these specifica- tions, it has been done, in most cases, in order to establish a standard. Where the phrase "or equal", or its equivalent is used in connection with a particular item of material or equipment, the products of others than the particular manufacturers men- tioned will be acceptable, if of suitable type and construction, but any substitution must be of quality as good as, or better than, the named article. Where the phrase "or equal" or its equivalent, is not used in connection with a particular item of material or equipment only the product of the manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable. (B) If the Contractor elects to substitute other equipment or materials for that specified by name, he shall be fully respon- sible for all coordination with other trades involved. Any expense incurred because of modifications to accommodate larger sizes, larger electrical service, fuel requirements resulting from such substitution shall be borne by the Contractor sub- stituting other equipment. (C) Upon being awarded the Contract for the work under one of the following sections, the Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days, submit for approval a complete list of the materials which he proposes to use. The list shall give the manufacturer's names and designations corresponding to every item and where submitted materials are different from that specified by name, the submis- sion shall be accompanied by a complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data and drawings, necessary to give full and complete details. (D) All submittal shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Each submittal shall have on the fly sheet evidence the Contrac- tor has fully examined the data submitted and that each item is clearly marked, meets the specifications, will fit the available space and is approved by him. Such evidence shall be signed by the Contractor. Any submittal not complying with the above requirements will not be approved, will be returned unchecked and shall be resubmitted. 15010-2 (E) Any item on this list which is rejected because of un- suitability or inferior quality, must be replaced by an accep- table item within two (2) weeks following notification of the Contractor of such rejection. If no satisfactory material is submitted within two (2) weeks, then the Architect reserves the right to notify the Contractor as to the type and make of materials he will be required to furnish. Six (6) copies of the material and the equipment list shall be furnished by the Contractor in neat and firmly bound brochures for approval. 5. SHOP DRAWINGS: (A) Where shop drawings are required in these specifications, six (6) copies shall be furnished by the Contractor in sufficient {� time so that no delay in the work will be caused. Shop drawings are required to facilitate progress on the job. All materials shall be new and of quality indicated by the specifications unless noted otherwise. 6. PRECEDENCE: (A) The work covered in this section shall have precedence over .each other in accordance with the following sequence: (1) Soil and waste piping (2) Duct work (3) Cold and hot water piping (4) Electric wiring 7. EXAMINATION OF SITE: (A) Bidders upon the work under these headings shall visit the site to satisfy themselves as to the nature and scope of the work to be done before submitting bids. (B) Submission of a bid will be taken as evidence that examina- tion of the site has been made and that all such conditions that will effect the work have been taken into consideration. (C) Information given or not given on the plans shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility. 8. PROTECTION OF WORK AND MATERIALS: (A) The Contractor shall protect the work and all materials (whether incorporated in the building or not) and shall cover openings to protect the building from the weather. (B) The Contractor shall provide protection of all work in progress and shall be responsible for all damage done to the Owner's property or to any adjacent properties during the construction. 15010-3 9. GENERAL PIPING AND CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS: (A) The Contractor shall furnish and install (including all labor and materials required), the various piping systems and herein specified, adhering to the general routing and methods of distribution shown on the drawings; including all required pipe, fittings, hangers, valves, sleeves, inserts, gages, thermometers and such other items and appurtenances that may be required for the satisfactory operation of the various systems. (B) All piping and conduit shall be installed in a direct, and neat, and workmanlike manner, employing only mechanics skilled in each respective trade. (C) Exposed lines shall run parallel with or perpendicular to building lines, and wherever possible, shall be grouped together for easier service and have precedence in routing over all other lines. Wherever possible, horizontal and vertical lines shall be held as close as possible to the walls, ceilings, structural member, etc., so as to occupy the minimum space (consistent with the proper requirements) for insulation, expansion, removal of pipe and access to valves, dampers, etc. (D) In general, all piping and all conduit in finished areas of the building shall be run concealed in chases, furrings, below floor, or above suspended ceiling, unless noted or directed other wise. Should any condition arise which would cause any piping to be exposed in finished areas, it shall immediately be called to the Architect's attention, and the Contractor shall bear any and all expense in connection with rearranging his work as directed to facilitate its concealment. (E) Conduit may be exposed on walls where concealment is not possible, or required. All such exposed conduit shall be run straight and true without offsets or bends, and shall be perfect- ly vertical or horizontal. All conduit shall have couplings and connectors as noted in the Electrical Specifications. M Valves which are required for the control or isolation of any and all parts of the systems shall be furnished, installed and located in an accessible position, or made accessible through removable panels, etc. Where several valves are related in function, they shall be grouped in a pattern. - (G) Unions, or flanges, shall be used at connections to all equipment to facilitate dismantling, and elsewhere as required in the erection of the pipe or in the installation of valves. Unions shall be accessible. (H) Connections to rotating equipment shall be made in such manner as to prevent transmission of vibration into the piping systems. All connections where ferrous and nonferrous pipe join shall be made with approved isolation fittings. 15010-4 (I) Nipples shall be of the same material and composition as the w- pipe on which they are installed, and shall be extra heavy when unthreaded shoulder is less than one (1) inch. No running thread nipples will be permitted. (J) Steel pipe 2-1/2" and larger shall be welded, using "Tube - turn" fittings, or approved equal. Pipe 2" and smaller may be threaded, using screwed fittings. (K) All piping in Mechanical Room and exposed piping shall be color coded with PVC tape markers as manufactured by Brady, or approved equal. Tape markers will be spaced no more than 10' apart. Each marker shall be furnished with background color as listed below, name of pipe, and arrow in direction of flow. (L) Legend: Pipe Color City Water Vista Green. Compressed Air Green Steam Supply Safety Yellow Chilled Water Supply & Return Spanish Blue Heating Water Supply & Return Spanish -Blue Steam Condensate Sunset Orange Domestic Hot Water Domestic Coral Waste & Vents Black 10. INTERFERENCES: (A) The plans are generally diagrammatic and each Contractor must harmonize and coordinate the work of the different trades so ®. that interferences between piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be avoided. (B) All necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly install the work must be kept as close as possible to the structure so as to take up the minimum amount of space and all offsets, fitting, etc., required to accomplish it, must be ,., furnished and installed by each Contractor without additional expense to the Owner. (C) The plans do not give exact details as to elevations of ducts and lines and do not show all offsets, control lines and other installation details. 'Each Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the general construction conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturer. of the equipment to be installed and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. (D) The plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans, by measurements at 15010-5 the building and in harmony and cooperation with other Contrac- tors. Minor relocations necessitated or directed by the Archi- tect shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 11. LARGE APPARATUS: (A) Any large piece of apparatus to be installed in any space in the building and which is too large to permit access through stairways, doorways, or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing of the structure is completed. 12. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: (A) The Contractor for the work covered by each section of these specifications shall furnish and install all foundations and supports required by equipment included in his work. (B) All piping, both vertical and horizontal, shall be supported at sufficient close intervals to keep its alignment, prevent sagging and to prevent pipe from being supported by equipment or equipment connections. (C) Vertical pipes shall be supported from floor with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and adequately support their weight. Vertical copper tubing, 1-1/4" and smaller shall be supported at 3' intervals and at the base of pipe risers, where required for proper support. Hangers shall be manufactured by Kindorff, Unistrut, Elcen or equal. Where multiple pipes are indicated, they may be supported on a continuous hanger. All hangers must meet the Architect's approval. Use of perforated straps will not be permitted. (D) All horizontal pipes suspended with structure above shall be supported by hanger rods of the following size: (1) Pipes up to and including 2" 3/8" rods (2) 2-1/2" and 3" pipe 1/2" rods (3) 4" and 5" pipe 5/8" rods (4) 6" pipe 3/4" rods (E) Where pipes are supported from overhead concrete construc- tion, the hanger rods shall be provided as detailed on the plans. (F) Soil 'pipe shall be supported at all turns and at intervals not to exceed 5' on centers on straight runs. The following table gives maximum hanger spacing for copper and steel lines but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessary: SIZE OF LINE HANGER SPACING 3/4" and smaller 5' 1" 6' 1-1/4" 7' 15010-6 1-1/2" 8' 2" to 4", 10' Larger than 4" 12' (G) If pipes of different Contractors can be racked on the same supporting structure, each Contractor shall cooperate with the others involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of the labor and materials ^" involved in the installation. 13. EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF PIPES: (A) Swing joints, turns, expansion loops, or long offsets, shall be provided wherever shown on the drawings, and where necessary to allow for the expansion of piping within the building. Broken pipes.or fittings due to rigid connection shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Anchors shall be installed where shown or required to control expansion of piping system. Anchors shall be of the clamp type securely fastened to the building structure. 14. UNIONS: (A) Unions shall not -be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the building unless ,._ shown on drawings or specified. Unions shall.be installed on both sides of all valves, regulators, check valves, traps, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected. Where copper pipes joins iron or steel pipe, an insulation union using a "'. "Bakelite" insulator shall be used. 15. PIPE SLEEVES: (A) Each Contractor shall provide sleeves for all pipes which pass through foundations, walls, slabs, floors, ceilings, partitions or other building construction. (B) All sleeves which are in a vertical position shall be constructed of No. 26 gauge galvanized sheet steel. All sleeves ,.. which are in a horizontal position shall be constructed of standard weight steel pipe, sized to leave at least 1/2" clear spacing around the pipe passing through. (C) Sleeves installed through waterproof floors shall be extended 2" above finished floors. (D) Sleeves in exterior building walls below grade shall be installed to make a waterproof installation as approved by the Architect. 16. ESCUTCHEONS: (A) Where exposed to view pipes, insulated or bare, passing through floors, walls, or ceilings, shall be filled with near, 15010-7 Q heavy spun or stamped steel escutcheons, firmly secured to the pipes. Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameter to surround both the pipe and the sleeves. The sleeve shall have a nickel plated finish, fabricated in one piece'and shall be firmly anchored in space. "Snap -on" type escutcheons will not be permitted. 17. SOIL CONDITIONS: (A) These specifications and drawings in no way stipulate the condition of the soil to be encountered. When excavation may be required in execution of the work, this Contractor agrees that he has informed himself regarding conditions affecting the work, labor and materials required, with recourse of any representation of soil conditions that may appear or seem to be implied in any portion of the Contract Documents. 18. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING: (A) Trenches for underground pipes shall be excavated by the Contractor to the required depths and bell holes shall be provided to insure uniform bearing. Excavation below grade shall be refilled with sand, or gravel firmly compacted.. Where rock is encountered, it shall be excavated to a grade 3-inches below the lowermost part of the pipe and the trench shall be refilled to the grade as above specified. Trenches shall be sheathed or braced, and pumping or bailing performed as may be necessary to protect the workmen and adjacent structures and to permit proper execution of the work. After pipe lines have been tested, inspected and approved by the Architect, the trenches shall be backfilled with approved materials, fill materials under slabs shall be placed in eight -in layers and each layer compacted to not less than 90% of maximum density. 19. ELECTRICAL WIRING FOR HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING: (A) Except for those items normally wired at their point of manufacturer and so delivered, (and unless specifically noted to the contrary herein or on the plans), the Electrical Contractor under the Electrical Section of the specifications will furnish and install all conduit, wire, junction boxes, and conduit fittings, will do all electrical wiring at panelboards, motor starters, at the motor junction or terminal boxes, and shall install and connect all electrical devices for the temperature control system. The Mechanical Contractor under the Plumbing and/or Heating and Air Conditioning Sections of these specifica- tions shall erect each motor in its respective place. All electric devices required for the complete installation of the temperature control system shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor and turned over to the Electrical Contractor for installation and connection. Temperature controls shall be installed in accordance with wiring diagrams furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, and approved by the Architect. Damage to 15010-8 equipment caused by deviation from the methods shown on the diagrams shall be paid by the Electrical Contractor. 20. UTILITY CONNECTIONS: (A) Utility connection locations, depths, sizes, characteristics and capacities shall be verified by each Contractor utilizing these items and any discrepancies from those shown on the plans shall be brought to the Architect's attention before bidding. Any and all utility connections shall be made by the Contractor, as required, with no increase to the Owner above the price ._. indicated in the Contractor's proposal. 21. CUTTING AND PATCHING: (A) Each Contractor shall do all necessary cutting and patching of walls, floors, partitions, ceiling, etc., as required for the proper installation of his work under these contracts in a neat and workmanlike manner and as approved by the Architect. No structural member shall be cut by the Contractor without first obtaining written permission from the Architect. (B) All drilling and patching for expansion bolts, hangers and other supports shall be done by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. (C) Labor and materials required to replace or rebuild parts cut or injured shall be furnished at,this Contractor's expense, subject to Architect's satisfaction and approval. (D) Each Contractor shall be responsible for damages to other Contractor's installations and equipment. 22. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: (A) Materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from any defects. Materials and equipment for which the Underwriters' Laboratories have established as standard, shall be listed by the Under- writers' Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear their label. (B) Each Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to the job and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of same. This will be provided until final acceptance of the job. (C) Each Contractor shall provide protection against weather, so as to maintain all materials and equipment free from injury and damage. All new work likely to be damaged shall be covered during the day and at the end of each day. (D) Each Contractor will furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools, appurtenances and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of this contract. 15010-9 (E) The workmanship shall be in all respects, the highest grade and all construction in accordance with the best practice of the trade. 23. CODES AND ORDINANCES: (A) All work performed under this contract will be done in strict accordance with state and local codes or ordinances, the current edition of the National Plumbing Code, National Electri- cal Code and all current supplements thereto and any other authorities having jurisdiction over the work. 24. FEES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS: (A) The Contractor shall procure all necessary permits and licenses, observe and abide by all applicable laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the Federal Government, State and/or City where the project is to be constructed, or any other duly constituted public authority and shall hold and save the Owner harmless from any liability or penalty which might be imposed by reason of any real or alleged violation of such laws, regulations, ordinances, or other rules. All municipal inspec- tion fees and the cost of such service connections to municipally or privately owned utilities as may be required, shall be paid for by the Contractor whose work occasions the same. Each Contractor shall obtain and pay for all certificates of approval which shall be delivered to the Architect before final acceptance of the project. (B) All materials and labor furnished by the Contractor shall be in strict accordance with the rules, regulations, and require- ments of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, State and Municipal regulations and other authorities that may have lawful jurisdiction of the work being done. 25. MOTORS, MOTOR CONTROLS AND TEMPERATURE CONTROLS: (A) Electric motors shall be of the speed, phase, and voltage as specified and shall be of the type recommended by motor manufac- turer and approved by the Architect for the type of service involved. (B) The Mechanical Contractor furnishing the motor shall install same and shall deliver to the Electrical Contractor such motor controls and starting equipment as specified under the various heading in the Plumbing, Heating and Air Conditioning specifica- tions, unless otherwise specified. The erection and connection of all switches, starting control equipment, and wiring of same shall be done by the Electrical Contractor, unless specified otherwise. Conduits from controllers to motors shall not be flexible for over 3' and shall be attached to the terminal housing of the motor. 15010-10 0 (C) Where "controls" are called for in the Plumbing, Heating and Air Conditioning Specifications, the control instruments, such as motorized damper motors, motorized valves, etc., shall be installed by the Contractor furnishing the controls, but all wiring necessary shall be done by the Electrical Contractor, unless specified otherwise under specific headings. (D) The Mechanical Contractor furnishing the controls shall furnish a controls wiring diagram and an interlocking wiring diagram to the Electrical.Contractor, unless specified otherwise under specific headings. (E) It shall be the various Contractors responsibility to coordinate and verify their respective motor electrical charac- teristics with electrical service characteristics that the Electrical Contractor finally provides. (F) Any information given on the plans, specifications, submit- tal data, etc., shall not relieve the various Contractors of this responsibility. (G) Any motor with incorrect job -site electrical characteristic ti- conditions -shall be removed and replaced with a motor of current electrical characteristics without additional cost to the Owner. 26. FLASHING: (A) Each soil pipe which projects through the roof or through a waterproof deck shall be flashed with sheet lead weighing no less than 4 pounds per square foot. Flashing shall extend at least 10" in all directions from the pipe and shall be caulked into the hub joint of the pipe or turned over into the top of the pipe. The hub joints shall be not less than 6" above the level of the roof or deck. (B) Pipes and conduits of any nature that penetrate the roof or a waterproof deck shall be run through pitch pockets in a manner approved by the Architect, unless otherwise specified on the plans. 27. TESTING: (A) Each Contractor shall, at his own expense, perform the various tests as specified, required by the Architect and as required by State and local authorities. Contractors shall furnish all fuel, equipment and materials necessary for making such tests. 28. MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: (A) All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as directed by the manufacturer. 15010-11 29. COOPERATION: (A) Each Contractor shall cooperate with General Contractor and all other Contractors to coordinate and expedite the work. To avoid interferences and delays, arrange all parts of work so as to harmonize with all other parts. 30. CLEANING: (A) Contractor must not allow waste material or rubbish caused by their employees to accumulate on or about the premises. At the completion of the work, they shall remove all rubbish and tools, scaffolding and surplus materials from and about the building. All work will be thoroughly cleaned and left ready for use. 31. PAINTING: (A) Unless otherwise specified under the Plumbing, Heating and/or Air Conditioning and Electrical Specifications, no painting shall be required in this section. (B) Where painting is required, it shall be as specified under Division 9. 32. CONTINUATION OF OPERATIONS: (A) The Contractor shall realize that the existing building houses a going institution and must remain in operation through- out the construction period. (B) Any interruption in utilities shall be coordinated with the Architect a minimum of seven calendar days in advance and, if required, shall occur outside the normal operating hours of the building. (C) Special care shall be taken while performing work in the existing portion of the building to assure neat appearances in those areas being used at all times during the business hours. All excess materials, tools, equipment and debris shall be removed and the area left clean at the end of each day. 33. DEMOLITION: (A) Each contractor shall remove those items shown on the plans to be removed for each respective trade. (B) All items to be removed or discarded are property of the Owner and shall be stacked as directed by the Architect or Owner unless indicated to become property of the Contractor in which case all items shall be removed from the site. (C) Contractor shall take care not to damage more of the existing facilities than is absolutely necessary. All concrete 15010-12 r to be removed shall be cored or sawed to widths to allow the installation of pipes or conduits indicated and replaced by Contractor who occasions the work. 34. EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS: (A) Each Contractor shall make all connections of equipment furnished under other contracts to provide for proper operation. (B) Where indicated on the drawings each Contractor shall relocate existing equipment and provide all connections to leave the unit in proper operating condition. 35. GUARANTEE: r` (A) Each Contractor shall guarantee all labor, and materials furnished by him for a period of one year from the time of final acceptance of the building. The guarantee shall cover the complete repair -or replacement without additional cost to Owner of any and all defects, which in the opinion of the Architect are a result of defective material or faulty workmanship. Failure by any Contractor to mail in equipment warranty cards will not relieve him of this responsibility. 36. FINALLY: (A) All plant, apparatus, appliances, material, and labor that may be necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent or purpose of these specifications shall be furnished by each Contractor, without extra cost,,as if mentioned in these specifications or shown on the plans. See "Contract Closeout Requirements" under Division 1 - General Requirements for Additional Requirements. (B) Each contractor shall provide operating and maintenance instructions for.each piece of equipment he furnishes under this contract and shall instruct the Owner's representative in operat- ing said equipment. 15010-13 PLUMBING 1. GENERAL: (A) Refer to "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical" for other requirements for plumbing work. 2. SCOPE OF WORK: (A) The work covered by these specifications consists of the furnishing of all equipment, materials, labor, fees, permits, meters, paving cuts, and certificates of inspection that may be required for the installation of the plumbing work specified, , shown on the drawings, and required by code or State authorities. 3. WATER SYSTEM• (A) From the points shown on the plans, a cold water service shall be run as indicated on the plans, with branch lines extended to all plumbing fixtures, hosebibbs, and items of equipment consuming water all as shown on the plans and/or as hereinafter specified. (B) All hot and cold water piping except as noted, shall be type "L" hard copper tubing with wrought copper fittings, ASTM Designation B-88. Pipe underground shall be type "K" hard drawn copper. Fittings shall be of the same manufacturer as the tubing, and shall be attached with 95/5 solder. No joints shall be made while the pipe is under strain. On all connections, elbows, and side openings of tees, the pipes to be jointed shall be supported at exact right angles to each other while fittings are being sweated. (C) For all gate and globe valves in cold water lines and hot water lines where hot water is 180 degrees or less, use Nibco "Husky," "U" valve Figure No. 22 or equal for screwed ends and Figure No. 722 or equal for sweat ends in sizes 2" and smaller. (D) Check valves for all water lines 3" and smaller shall be Nibco/Scott T-433 or equal for screwed ends and S-433 or equal for sweat ends. (E) The top ends of all hot and cold water risers at each group of fixtures shall be provided with capped air chambers the full size of the risers and not less than 18" in height. (F) Grade all piping systems to low points and there provide valved drains. Drains shall be located so as to be accessible. (G) Provide electrolic isolators between copper and galvanized piping. 15400-1 4. PIPE INSULATION: (A) All hot and cold water piping in the building shall be insulated with 1", 3-1/2 lb. density, molded glass fiber insula- tion with factory applied white universal jacket. The lon- gitudinal seam and end strip shall be stapled and sealed with adhesive. Fittings other than unions and valves shall be covered with glass fiber blanket, covered with the insulating cement, followed with jacket. Insulation ends (at unions and valves) shall be sealed with insulating cement and matching jacket material in a quality manner. Unions and valves located in attics shall be insulated. Plumbing fixture connections need not be insulated. Exposed piping in Mechanical rooms shall have a .016" aluminum jacket around the insulation and shall overlap l". Fasten snugly with .020 SS bands not less than 24" on centers. (B) Insulate the drain from the electric water coolers, roof drain lines and condensate lines same as for domestic water. 5. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: (A) This Contractor shall make all gas, water, waste, and �. sanitary vent connections to all items of equipment furnished under this section or by others. He shall furnish all valves, traps, unions, faucets, etc., required for a complete, working installation in all cases. Provide shut-off valves on all water and gas lines serving such equipment at equipment connections. (B) This Contractor shall connect all equipment furnished by others. See the specifications for a list of special equipment and the plans for locations. No equipment rough -ins shall be started until the Contractor has a copy of approved shop draw- ings. 6. TESTS: "^ (A) This Contractor shall perform all tests as hereinafter specified, as well as any other tests which may be required by the local plumbing inspector or any other authorities having �^ jurisdiction over the work. Tests are as follows: (1) All water lines shall be tested under hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig for a period of twelve (12) hours and proved tight and free from leaks at that pressure. Where water lines are concealed, other than in vertical pipe chases, the test period shall be extended to 24 �^ hours. (2) This Contractor shall perform such operating tests as may be directed by the Architect to prove the perfor- mance of the various systems. These operating tests shall cover a period of not less than one hour each. 15400-2 7. STERILIZATION: (A) The entire hot and cold water piping system shall be thor- oughly sterilized with a solution containing not less than fifty (50) parts per million (ppm) of available chlorine or sodium hypochlorite solution and shall be introduced into the system in a manner approved by the Architect. The sterilizing solution shall be allowed to remain in the system for a period of 24 hours, during which time all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. All residual of 4 ppm shall be produced in all parts of the system at the end of the 24 hour period. After sterilizing, the solution shall be flushed from the system with clean water until the residual of chlorine content is not greater than .02 ppm unless otherwise noted. 8. CLEANING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND OPERATION: (A) After all work covered in this section of the specifications -has been completed, this Contractor shall do all cleaning and adjusting required and shall prove the capacity and performance of all portions for the various systems. This Contractor shall provide and install where directed typewritten operating instruc- tions and wiring diagrams for all items of equipment and ap- paratus. Instructions and wiring diagrams shall be framed and mounted under glass and shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before final acceptance of the work. 9. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: (A) The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner one complete set of approved shop drawings, ASME certification where required, affidavits where required and copies of all equipment warranties. 15400-3 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 1. GENERAL: (A) The "General Conditions," and "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical" documents issued by the Architect are hereby incorporated in these specifications and form a part thereof. 2. SCOPE OF WORK: (A) The work covered by these specifications consists of the furnishing of all equipment, materials, labor, fees, permits, and certificates of inspection that may be required to complete the heating, ventilating and air conditioning work specified, shown on the drawings, and required by code. ..,. (B) The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following items: (1) Ducts (supply, return and exhaust) (2) Grilles, registers and diffusers 3. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical. 4. REGULATIONS AND ORDINANCES: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical. r-. 5. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." 6. SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK: (A) Sheet metal duct work shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets, suitable for low velocity systems as hereinafter specified. Unless otherwise approved, ducts shall conform accurately to the dimensions indicated and shall be straight and smooth on the inside, with joints neatly finished. Ducts shall be securely attached on the framing in the building and the method of anchoring and/or fastening shall be as hereinafter specified as to be completely free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Supports shall be attached only to structural framing members, suitable intermediate metal framing shall be provided and installed. 15800-1 0 (B) All duct and installations shall be in accordance with the SMACNA Manual for Low.Velocity Ductwork. 7. CLEANING, TESTING AND OPERATION: (A) Before final acceptance of the work, all equipment and materials shall be cleaned. (B) Any damage to equipment paint shall be repaired by this Contractor, using matching colors and materials. (C) All tests required by the Architect, by local and state authorities, or as specified, shall be done by this Contractor, without additional cost to the Owner. Defects found by tests shallbe immediately repaired and the tests repeated. (D) All tests will be accomplished under the Owner's super- vision. 8. GUARANTEE: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." 15800-2 ELECTRICAL 1. GENERAL: (A) The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect are hereby incor- porated in these specifications and form a part thereof. 2. SCOPE OF WORK: (A) The work to be done under this section of the specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, devices, supplies, and certificates of inspection that may be required to complete and leave ready for operation the electrical work specified, shown on the drawings and required by law, codes and ordinances. r^ 3. SHOP DRAWINGS: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." 4. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." (B) All submittal shall be'the responsibility of the Contractor. Each submittal shall have on the fly sheet evidence that the Contractor has fully examined the data submitted and that each item is clearly marked, meets the specifications, will fit the p- available space and is'approved by him. Such evidence shall be signed by the Contractor. Any submittal not complying with the above requirements will not be approved, will be returned unchecked, and shall be resubmitted. 5. LAWS, CODES, AND ORDINANCES: -- (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." 6. ADEQUACY OF SERVICES: (A) Within 30 days after the award of contract, this Contractor shall verify the adequacy of the electrical and telephone services with the various utility companies involved in the project. Such verification shall include the following: . (1) Exact location of electrical service point of connec- tion, voltage characteristics of service, type of service (overhead or underground), metering require- ments and any deviations from that shown on the drawings or specified herein. 16010-1 (2) Exact location of telephone service, routing and size of service conduit and any deviation from that shown on the drawings or specified herein. (B) The above information shall be included in the first electrical submittal data transmitted to the Architect. Failure to include such information will cause a delay in the approval of the submittal data and shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities. 7. CONTINUATION OF OPERATIONS: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." 8. GENERAL WIRING REQUIREMENTS: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." (B) All wiring shall be installed in metallic raceways. Thin wall conduit (electrical metallic tubing) may be used where permitted by the National Electrical Code on all branch lighting and control circuits, except on conduit runs made in or under the floor slab, or where exposed to the weather. Galvanized rigid or I.M.T. conduit shall be used for all feeder and power circuits and where electrical metallic tubing is prohibited. (C) Joints shall be made tight with standard galvanized cou- plings. Ends of conduit shall be cut square and reamed and all joints brought butt -to -butt in couplings. Conduit may be jointed with steel compression -type or set screw fittings. Indenter type and cast fittings will not be approved. (D) Conduit connections to motors shall consist of twelve (12) inch length minimum flexible conduit, with the rigid conduit connection securely fastened to a wall or other non -vibrating support. Motor connections shall terminate in a "Condulet" fitting. Conduit exposed to weather shall have a durable plastic coating. (E) All metallic conduit below slab -on -fill or buried below grade shall be coated with 2 coats of asphalt paint before burial. 9. BRANCH CIRCUITS -LIGHTING AND POWER WIRING: (A) This Contractor shall furnish and install a complete system of lighting branch circuit wiring from the lighting panels to the various outlets. All wiring shall be substantially as shown on the drawings. 16010-2 (B) This Contractor shall furnish and install a complete system of motor branch circuit wiring from the respective panels to each motor, including setting and wiring of starters, disconnects, and control switches, as required and/or indicated on the drawings. Note that starters and push buttons used in connection with building heating and air conditioning motors will be furnished by their respective trade and turned over to this Contractor for installation and wiring. (C) No branch circuit or switch leg shall be installed with wire smaller than number twelve (#12) A.W.G. For branch circuits so indicated on drawings or in excess of 100 feet in length, number ten (#10) wire shall be used. Voltage drop shall not exceed 3% for branch circuits. (D) Special care shall be taken so that circuits are connected to the panels in such an arrangement as to insure, insofar as possible, that loads on the different phases at the panel are balanced. 10. CONTROL WIRING: (A) The Mechanical Contractor.will furnish all starters, thermostats, a.nd push buttons for the motors in connection with the heating and air conditioning systems. The Electrical �- Contractor shall install all such control devices and shall furnish and install all disconnects, fusible switches, fusetrons, fustats, conduit and wire necessary to connect all motors and control devices. The control wiring shall be installed in accordance with diagrams furnished by the Mechanical Contractor. All control wiring shall be installed in conduit, shall be 300 volt type TW and shall be number fourteen (#14) A.W.G. minimum as r- indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Mechanical Contractor. (B) See "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning" for other requirements. 11. MOTOR -DISCONNECT MEANS: (A) Each motor shall be provided with a disconnecting means under this section of the specifications, when required by the phase motors, a single- or double -pole toggle switch, rated only for alternating current, will be acceptable for capacities less than 30 amperes, provided the ampere rating of the switch is horsepower rated in conformance with Table III of Federal Specification W-S-865. Switches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors. 12. IDENTIFICATION TAGS: (A) Neatly embossed metal or plastic tags shall be installed beneath motor starters, pushbuttons, special switches, panel - boards, etc., designating items controlled by each controller. 16010-3 13. PITCH PANS: (A) All conduit., pipe, etc., passing through roof construction shall be installed in pitch pans, unless otherwise noted. 14. SAFETY SWITCHES: (A) Switches shall be Square "D" or approved equal, Class "R". (B) Switches shall meet Federal Specification WS-865C for Type HD and be Underwriters' Laboratories listed. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure unless otherwise specified, NEMA 3R (Raintight) switches shall be furnished as indicated and/or required by National Electrical Code. (C) Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240V. A.C. Full neutral shall be included for 4-wire, 3 phase, and 3-wire, single phase power. (D) Switches shall have visible blades so that the operator can see the open blades when the switch is in the open position. Switches shall be quick -make and quick -break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the opening or closing action of the contacts has started. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, with positive padlocking provisions in the OFF position. (E) Main switches shall be heavy duty type suitable for use as service entry equipment. (F) Disconnects shall be as described above, less fuses. 15. FUSES: (A) This Contractor shall furnish and install all fuses neces- sary to leave the installation complete and in working order, including a complete set of spare fuses for each fuse size and type. All.fuses shall be Bussman "Fusetrons" or "Fustats" of proper capacities, unless otherwise noted. Furnish and install Bussman, or approved equal, Model SFC spare fuse cabinet adjacent to the switchboard or where indicated on the drawings. 16. GROUNDING• (A) All conduit work, and other electrical equipment wired and connected by this Contractor, shall be effectively and permanent- ly grounded in accordance with National Electrical Code and local codes, using grounding conductors. (B) No grounding shall be done to any plumbing pipes. 16010-4 (C) Ground rods and mats shall be provided as shown on the drawings and/or as required. Provide proper size conduit from each switchgear and/or distribution panel to exterior of building for ground conductor. (D) Telephone equipment ground shall be provided from telephone equipment room to 10'-0" outside of building to ground rods by Cadweld Connectors. Telephone equipment ground conduit shall be 3/4". Provide 3/4" diameter X 8'-0" long copper clad ground rod at end of 3/4" conduit. �- 17. WIRE: (A) All conductors, unless otherwise noted or specified, shall be National Electrical Code type "TW" or "THW" copper, with conductivity equal to 98% that of pure copper. Conductors number 6 and larger shall be type THW. (B) The insulation on all wire and cable shall be rated at 600 volts except for the low voltage control or switching circuits which may be rated at 300 volts. (C) Number 8 and larger shall be stranded. Number 10 and number 12 shall be solid. All wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM, shall bear the Underwriters' approval and shall have size, voltage, and code markings stamped on insulation. 18. DEVICES AND PLATES: (A) General wiring devices and plates shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, or approved equal, and shall be similar to the following: (1) Quiet type switches, SPST, 20A, 120/277V 1221-I Quiet type switches, 3-way, 20A, 120-177V 1223-I _ Pilot lighted switches, SPST, 20A, 120V 1221-PL (2) Duplex receptacle -Grounding type 20A, 125V 5362-I Duplex receptacle -Isolated Ground 20A, 125V IG-5362 (3) weatherproof receptacle -Grounding type 20A, 125V 5214 (4) Switch plates, stainless steel 93071 (5) Duplex receptacle plate, stainless steel 93101 (6) Telephone outlet plate, stainless steel 93181 (7) Blank plate 93121 (8) Quadraplex floor convenience outlets: Hubbell No. 4233 outlet box with two (2) No. S-3825 cover and metal r' carpet flange and Hubbell #IG-5362. 16010-5 Notes: (a) Equivalent type gang plates shall be provided when two or more devices are located together. (b) Contractor shall tacle required to equipment. 19. LIGHTING FIXTURES: verify the exact type of recep- mate with any Owner furnished (A) This Contractor shall furnish, install and wire lighting fixtures as shown and scheduled. Each fixture shall be complete with all necessary hangers, mounting devices, shades, canopies, louvers, reflectors, lamps and other devices required. Fluores- cent ballasts shall be high power factor, class "P". (B) Fixtures which are surface mounted on low density combus- tible ceilings shall be UL approved for such mounting, and shall be furnished by.the manufacturer with spacers to maintain the required spacing. (C) Manufacturers names and catalog numbers have been scheduled to establish quality and performance standards, and to provide a basis for competitive bidding. Contractor shall verify ceiling construction for all type fixtures. (D) Lamps of the proper type wattage, and voltage rating shall be furnished ana installed in each new fixture. (1) Incandescent lamps shall conform to Federal Specifica- tions W-L-101. (2) Fluorescent lamps shall conform to Federal Specifica- tion W-L-116 and shall have standard cool white color characteristics or as specified on drawings. (3) H.I.D. lamps shall be self -extinguishing type 'T' lamps. Universal mounting or self -ballasting lamps shall not be used. (E) Fluorescent fixtures indicated to have dual switching shall have the inboard lamps connected to one ballast and the outboard lamps connected to the other ballast. (F) Lighting fixtures so indicated on the drawings shall be provided with emergency lighting feature. Components shall consist of a sealed nickel -cadmium battery and a solid state invertor, charger and switch system. The components shall be self-contained within the fixture and be factory installed. The rechargeable battery shall operate one lamp at an emergency level for a minimum of 90 minutes. The fixture shall be UL listed. System shall have a 5 year unconditional guarantee. Units on 16010-6 switched circuits shall be wired such that the fixture can be switched off without causing the emergency battery to operate. 20. OUTLET BOXES: (A) In general, all outlet boxes shall be concealed and shall be constructed of code gauge steel, galvanized inside and outside. (B) Bracket outlets shall be installed at a height which is shown on the plans, or as directed on the job. Switch outlets shall be installed four feet (41) above the finished floor, unless otherwise noted. Receptacle outlets shall be installed sixteen inches (16") above the floor, and six inches (6") above counter tops, unless otherwise noted. 21. JUNCTION BOXES: (A) Where shown or required, junction or pull boxes shall be �- provided, to facilitate pulling, splicing, taping, or nesting of conductors. Such boxes shall be of adequate size to suit the purpose, constructed of code gauge steel, galvanized outside and inside, and securely fastened to the building structure, indepen- dent of the conduit. e-- 22. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: (A) This Contractor shall furnish all necessary hangers, brackets, clamps etc., as required to properly support all conduit and other devices and equipment in such a manner as to prevent sag and undue strain. Cast "C" clamps, "U" straps or ring hangers attached to rods and/or brackets and fastened to the building structure by means of approved plates, shall be used for individual conduits. Perforated straps will not be permitted. Where necessary, provide channel or angle supports or brackets for switches, starters and other equipment. 23. SLEEVES AND INSERTS: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and �- Electrical." 24. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO SPECIAL EQUIPMENT: (A) This Contractor shall make all electrical connections to equipment furnished by the Owner and under other contracts, and furnish wiring conduit, outlet boxes, etc., as required for same throughout the building. He shall check the heating, ventilat- ing, and plumbing plans and specifications, and inform himself as to the amount of such wiring, and include same in his bid. (B) Motor controls and starting devices for all heating, air conditioning and refrigeration equipment will be furnished by the equipment manufacturer and installed by this Contractor. 16010-7 (C) All such wiring as mentioned above shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, provided no violations of local ordinances or codes are encountered, and the quality of methods and workmanship are as specified elsewhere herein. (D) All heating, air conditioning, refrigeration, and control wiring shall be color coded without any splices. (E) Various items of existing equipment such as clothes dryer, freezer/cooler, sump pump, etc. will be located. This Contractor shall reconnect such items directed, indicated or required. 25. HANDY BOXES: (A) Exhaust fans, and all other not requiring starters, shall be equipped with "Fustats." Boxes protected item. 26. MISCELLANEOUS: items of electrical equipment protected by handy boxes shall be on or adjacent to the (A) The Contractor shall verify with Architect (before starting installation) the exact location of all receptacles, junction boxes, switches, and telephone outlets. 27. CUTTING AND PATCHING: (A) Refer to "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." 28. TESTS: (A) After installation is completed, and at such time as the Architect may direct, the Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval. The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this specifica- tion. The test shall be performed in the presence of .the Architect or his authorized representative. This Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for the test. 29. GUARANTEE: (A) Refer to "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." 16010-8 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 1. GENERAL• (A) The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect are hereby incorporated in these specifications and form a part thereof. 2. SCOPE OF WORK• (A) The work to be done under this section of the specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, devices, supplies, and certificates of inspection that may be required to complete and leave ready for operation the electrical work specified, shown on the drawings and required by law, codes and ordinances. 3. SHOP DRAWINGS: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." 4. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." (B) All submittal shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Each submittal shall have on the fly sheet evidence that the Contractor has fully examined the data submitted and that each item is clearly marked, meets the specifications, will fit the available space and is approved by him. Such evidence shall be signed by the Contractor. Any submittal not complying with the above requirements will not be approved, will be returned unchecked, and shall be resubmitted. 5. LAWS CODES AND ORDINANCES: (A) See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." 6. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: (A) General• (1) The work included under this section consists of furnishing of all materials and equipment in the performing of all labor and service necessary to the complete installation of the fire alarm system including all related systems and accessories for the building, all as indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 16020 - 1 (2) The work shall be complete in all respects and shall include all devices and appurtenances which are normal for the system intended. Each and every system shall be turned over to the Owner in a balanced, tested and first class operating condition. (3) All interlocking wiring required by the system operation sequencing herein specified between the various electrical systems shall be performed under this section of the specification. (4) The Fire Alarm System equipment shall be manufactured by Notifier Company or approved equal and constitutes the type and quality of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment manufacturer shall have service capability in this city. (5) The system shall be a 24 VDC, closed circuit, electrically supervised, remote zone annunciated local type fire alarm system and shall comply with the applicable provisions of the current NFPA Standard 72A and the Life Safety Code 101 and shall meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction. All equipment and devices shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and approved by Factory Manual. (B) EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION: (1) Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment is identified on the drawings or in the specifications by reference to manufacturer's vendor's names, trade names, catalog numbers, or the like, it is so identified for the purpose of establishing a standard, and any material, article, or piece of equipment of other manufacturers or vendors which will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design will be considered equally acceptable provided the material, article or piece of equipment so proposed is, in the opinion of the Architect, of equal substance, appearance and function. It shall not be purchased or installed by the Contractor without the Architect's written approval. (C) SYSTEM OPERATION: (1) Operation of any manual or automatic devices shall cause all signals to sound continuously and flash signal lights. Signals will sound until system is manually reset. (2) Trouble signal shall sound in event of open circuit or ground conditions. Control equipment shall be equipped with ringback feature. 16020 - 2 Giz (3) The system shall be zoned as indicated on the drawings. (D) EQUIPMENT: (1) The control panel shall be a Notifier model 4800 semi - flush mounted and shall be located where shown on the ,- drawings. The control panel shall operate as a non - coded, D.C. supervised system with zone annunciation and alarm signal resound. Provide one set of auxiliary alarm contacts and one set of auxiliary trouble contacts. Two supervised D.C. signal circuits powered from a 3 amp 24 VDC full wave rectified power supply shall be part of the basic unit. The power supply shall also contain an automatic trickle charger to maintain gelled electrolyte emergency batteries. The control shall include switches for city box disconnect, drill, silence, reset, and lamp test. The above R switches shall be behind the locked front panel to prevent tampering. The panel shall be of dead -front construction finished in beige baked -on enamel. (2) Manual pull stations shall be Notifier type BNG-R with a non break glass permanent retainer of high tensile coil spring steel which eliminates the need for break glass. (3) Audio -Visual units shall be Notifier 7001-24 strobe horns, flush mounted. Horns shall operate on 24 VDC at 0.063 amps and shall be rated at 86 dB at 10 feet. Flash rate on strobes shall be 1-3 flashes per second at peak light intensity of 8000 candle power. Both units shall be polarized for supervision. (4) Existing graphic annunciator is Notifier BLAU-40. Devices shall be point annunciated. E. TESTS: (1) After installation of the system is completed, and at such time as directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall conduct a complete system operating test for - approval. The test shall demonstrate that the system meets the operating requirements of this specification, that individual conductors of all circuits are free of grounds, shorts, and breaks and that no grounds exist between any piece of equipment in the control unit and cabinet. This test shall include the complete cycling of all fire, sound, etc., alarms and shall prove out all interlock wiring. F. GUARANTEE: (1) The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring 16020 - 3 free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from date of acceptance. (2) The manufacturer shall furnish gratis to the Owner a one (1) year contract effective from date of acceptance, for maintenance and inspection service of the manufacturer®s equipment with a minimum of two (2) inspections during the contract year. 6. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM: (A) This Contractor shall furnish and install a complete security alarm system as indicated on the drawings and specified below. The items of equipment for the security alarm system shall be as manufactured by Vista or approved equal. Installing company shall be licensed by the State of Texas Board of Private Investigators. (B) Intrusion detectors shall be Ademco twin element transmitter and receiver, wide angle. (C) Access stations shall be type 152 with stainless steel cover and tamperproof screws. (D) Control panel shall be Series 4012/8012 with control section, zone detection module, battery charger and power supply module, standby battery module, remote access control module, and remote reporting module all mounted in a flush cabinet. (1) Control section shall be complete with power indicator lamp, solid state integrated circuit lamp flasher, supervised circuit for alarm signals, cylindrical type pick resistant master control switch for selection of day or night security, test and reset, and an acknowledge switch. (2) Zone detection module shall have eight individual 24VDC supervised detection circuits with individual by-pass switches for access control and lamp test feature. (3) Door switches shall be 3/4" diameter concealed magnetic contacts. (4) Standby batteries shall be 24 volt 4.5 amp hour with a minimum of 4 hours of battery standby power. Batteries shall be rechargeable type gel -cell. (5) Remote access control module shall operate with remote access switches to allow a preset time for exit or entry to the building. (6) The remote reporting module shall report the security alarm status over leased telephone pairs to the police station. 16020 - 4 P- (E) System operation shall be as follows: (1) When the selector switch is set in the day position, all alarm circuits shall be in day position, all alarm circuits shall be in by-pass position. (2) When the selector switch is set in the night position, all alarm circuits shall be active. The interruption of the infrared beam at any transmitter/receiver station shall cause an alarm condition at the control panel, shall indicate the zone in alarm, shall sound alarm bells, and shall transmit an alarm signal to the police station. (3) Access to the building shall be provided without causing an alarm condition through the use of the time delay switches. (F) All wiring shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer and shall be run in conduit. 7. INTERCOM: (A) Furnish and install intercom stations and electric strike as indicated on the drawings.. (1) Electric strike shall be Vidcom model ES-128, with finish to match door hardware. (2) Desk intercom stations shall be surface mounted 3 station masters #375C. Door station shall be flush mounted weather resistant stainless steel. Install in locations as indicated on the plans. (B) Refer to Section 16010 for wiring and conduit requirements. (C) Guarantee• (1) The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from date of acceptance. (2) The manufacturer shall furnish gratis to the Owner a one (1) year contract effective from date of acceptance, for maintenance and inspection service of the manufacturer's equipment with a minimum of two (2) inspections during the contract year. -- 8. VIDEO CAMERA• (A) Furnish and install video camera system as indicated on the drawings. 16020 - 5 (B) Equipment• (1) Environmental camera enclosure shall be all aluminum construction as manufactured by Vidcom #APV-E5520. 75 watt heater, 15 watt defroster, and 10.5 watt blower #ST1 support strut. (2) Camera shall be Vidcom #KS-10 image sensor camera sequential scanning (non -interlace) 12 volt D.C. Camera shall have auto -iris lens for outdoor application s. Lens shall be #S7.5 -1.4E 7.5mml:1.4. (3) Video monitor shall be Vidcom #9BW or approved equal. Monitor shall be 9" black and white. (4) Video amplifier shall be Vidcom #M163 video transmission system for long distance transmissions. System shall include transmitter and receiver and power supplies. (5) Coax cables shall be R6 59U-CL2 with 20 ga. Solid copper center conductor with a 97% shield. (C) The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free of defects for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance. The Contractor shall also provide the owner with a proposal for one (1) year service contract if he so desires. END OF SECTION 16020 - 6 SPECIAL CONDITIONS -44- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)